JP2007196651A - Set of ink cartridges and ink cartridge - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a set of ink cartridges which can attain cost reduction by reducing the number of parts for fabricating the ink cartridges of different outer shapes, and to provide an ink cartridge. <P>SOLUTION: A case 200 for color consists of first and second case members 210 and 220. A case 2200 for large-volume black consists of first and second case members 2210 and 2220. A case 1200 for black consists of first and second case members 1210 and 220. Among the case members which constitute the three cases, the second case member 220 is made a common part of the cases 200 and 1200, so that the cost reduction can be attained. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2007,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a set of ink cartridges and an ink cartridge, and more particularly to a set of ink cartridges and an ink cartridge capable of reducing the number of parts for manufacturing ink cartridges having different outer shapes and reducing costs. .

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, an ink cartridge including a case having an ink storage chamber that stores ink therein is known. In the ink storage chamber of this ink cartridge, for example, yellow, cyan, and magenta inks for full-color printing and black ink for monochrome printing are stored. Ink cartridges for yellow, cyan, and magenta may be configured separately or may be configured integrally. Some black ink cartridges have an ink storage chamber with the same capacity as yellow, cyan, and magenta, and some have an ink storage chamber with a double capacity. In other words, the ink cartridge is formed so that the amount of ink stored in the ink storage chamber varies depending on the amount of ink consumed, and the size of the outer shape varies depending on the size of the ink storage chamber (Patent Document 1). ).

Furthermore, in recent years, in order to improve printing quality, in addition to ink cartridges that store yellow, cyan, and magenta ink colors, a plurality of color inks such as normal cyan, light cyan, normal magenta, and light magenta are stored. Ink cartridges are also known. These ink cartridges are also configured so that the amount of ink stored in the ink storage chamber differs depending on the amount of ink consumed or the size of the outer shape differs, and the number of ink colors used and the amount of ink consumed Various ink cartridges are combined according to the above (Patent Document 2).
JP-A-7-108688 (FIGS. 1 to 4 etc.) JP-A-11-58792 (FIGS. 5 to 8 etc.)

  Since the ink cartridges disclosed in Patent Documents 1 and 2 described above are generally formed of a resin material, they are manufactured by molding. However, when an ink cartridge is to be manufactured by molding, since the ink cartridge has an internal space for forming an ink storage chamber, at least two or more parts are molded, and the two or more It is manufactured by joining the parts. Therefore, as the types of ink colors used increase and the types of ink cartridges having different outer shape sizes increase, the number of parts to be molded by die molding increases, resulting in an increase in manufacturing cost. .

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and a set of ink cartridges capable of reducing the number of parts for manufacturing ink cartridges having different outer shapes and reducing the cost. It is an object to provide an ink cartridge.

  In order to achieve this object, the set of ink cartridges according to claim 1 comprises three or more types of ink cartridges having different sizes, and each ink cartridge is joined to each other to form an ink storage chamber. A pair of case members constituting a substantially rectangular parallelepiped case, and the case member includes a plate-like portion that forms a first surface that is the largest area of the case formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and A standing wall portion standing in a substantially vertical direction from the outer edge of the plate-like portion and forming a surface adjacent to the first surface of the case, and a through hole formed at the tip of the standing wall portion and communicating the inside of the case with the outside The pair of case members constituting the largest first ink cartridge among the three types of ink cartridges having different sizes. The rising wall portion is configured to be higher on one side and the other side than the pair of case members constituting the smallest third ink cartridge, and the second largest second ink cartridge is: One side of the pair of case members constituting the first ink cartridge is joined to the other side of the pair of case members constituting the third ink cartridge. The “case” in the present invention forms the outer shape of the ink cartridge, and includes the case where the ink storage chamber disposed therein is defined by the inner wall of the case.

  The ink cartridge set according to claim 2 is the ink cartridge set according to claim 1, wherein the through hole serves as a passage when ink in the ink storage chamber is supplied to the outside. The first cutout portions on one side and the other side of the case member are connected to each other.

  The ink cartridge set according to claim 3 is the ink cartridge set according to claim 2, wherein the first notch portion formed in each of the pair of case members constituting the first ink cartridge; The first cutout portions formed in each of the pair of case members constituting the ink cartridge 3 have the same shape.

  A set of ink cartridges according to claim 4 is the ink cartridge set according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the pair of case members constituting the first ink cartridge and the third ink cartridge are constituted. In the pair of case members, the heights of the standing wall portions on one side and the other side are equal.

  The set of ink cartridges according to claim 5 is the set of ink cartridges according to claim 4, wherein the height of the standing wall portions of the pair of case members constituting the first ink cartridge is the same as that of the third ink cartridge. It is twice the height of the standing wall of the pair of case members to be configured.

  The ink cartridge set according to claim 6 is the ink cartridge set according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the upright wall portion on one side of the pair of case members constituting the first ink cartridge is provided. The difference between the height and the height of the standing wall portion on one side of the pair of case members constituting the third ink cartridge is the difference between the height on the other side of the pair of case members constituting the first ink cartridge. The difference between the height of the upright wall portion and the height of the upright wall portion on the other side of the pair of case members constituting the third ink cartridge is different.

  The ink cartridge set according to claim 7 is the ink cartridge set according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein one of the pair of case members constituting the first ink cartridge is formed from a plate-like portion thereof. A rib is provided to stand in the height direction of the upright wall portion, and the height of the rib is the one of the pair of case members constituting the first ink cartridge and the third ink cartridge. This corresponds to a difference in height of the standing wall portion from one of the pair of case members.

  The ink cartridge set according to claim 8 is the ink cartridge set according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein each of the pair of case members accommodates a valve mechanism for opening and closing the through hole. A partition wall for forming a space is integrally formed.

  The ink cartridge set according to claim 9 is housed in the case constituted by the pair of case members in the ink cartridge set according to any one of claims 1 to 8, and the ink storage chamber And an ink supply part that protrudes to the outside through the through hole in a state of being accommodated in the case, and an ink supply hole is formed at a protruding tip of the ink supply part. Has been.

  The ink cartridge set according to claim 10 is the ink cartridge set according to claim 9, wherein the ink reservoir introduces the atmosphere into the ink reservoir protruding in a direction parallel to the ink supply unit. A second cutout portion for forming a through hole in the standing wall portion of the case member on the same plane as the first cutout portion for projecting the atmosphere introduction portion to the outside. It has.

  The ink cartridge set according to claim 11 is the ink cartridge set according to claim 9, wherein the ink reservoir is arranged in a direction parallel to the ink supply unit between the ink supply unit and the air introduction unit. And an irradiated portion that is irradiated with light emitted from an optical sensor provided in the ink jet recording apparatus when mounted on the ink jet recording apparatus. A third notch for forming a through hole exposing the irradiated portion to the outside is provided on the same surface as the surface on which the notch is formed.

  The ink cartridge set according to claim 12 is the ink cartridge set according to any one of claims 1 to 11, wherein the case member is made of a resin material.

  The ink cartridge according to claim 13 has an ink storage chamber in which ink is stored, and a through-hole for supplying the ink in the ink storage chamber to the outside. A pair of inks stored in the storage chamber is supplied to the ink jet recording apparatus, each of which is formed of a resin material and is connected to each other to form a substantially rectangular parallelepiped case in which the ink storage chamber is disposed. The case member is erected in a substantially vertical direction from a plate-like portion that forms a first surface that is the largest area of the case formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and an outer edge of the plate-like portion. And a standing wall portion that forms a surface adjacent to the first surface of the case, and a cutout portion that is formed at a tip of the standing wall portion to form the through hole. The “case” in the present invention forms the outer shape of the ink cartridge, and includes the case where the ink storage chamber disposed therein is defined by the inner wall of the case.

  According to the set of ink cartridges of the present invention, the substantially rectangular parallelepiped case in which the ink storage chamber is arranged by being joined to each other is constituted by a pair of case members, and the case member has the maximum area of the case. The first surface is formed by a plate-shaped portion, and the surface adjacent to the first surface is formed by a standing wall portion erected in a substantially vertical direction from the outer edge of the plate-shaped portion, and a through-hole that communicates the inside of the case with the outside Is formed by a first notch formed at the tip of the standing wall. The pair of case members constituting the largest first ink cartridge are higher in the standing wall portion on one side and the other side than the pair of case members constituting the smallest third ink cartridge. And the second largest second ink cartridge joins one side of the pair of case members constituting the first ink cartridge and the other side of the pair of case members constituting the third ink cartridge. Configured. Therefore, the first and third ink cartridges are formed with different sizes in the height direction of the standing wall portion. Further, since the second ink cartridge is constituted by a case member on one side of the first ink cartridge and a case member on the other side of the third ink cartridge, the first and third ink cartridges are provided. The size is different from the size of the outer shape. That is, three types of ink cartridges with different heights in the height direction of the standing wall portion can be produced by four members including a pair of case members constituting the first and third ink cartridges. Accordingly, when three types of ink cartridges having different outer shape sizes are manufactured, compared to the case where two case members are molded for each cartridge (total of six case members are molded), Since it can be manufactured with a point case member, the number of parts can be reduced, and the cost can be reduced.

  Further, according to the set of ink cartridges of the present invention, the first cutout portions on one side and the other side of the pair of case members are connected to supply the ink in the ink storage chamber to the outside. Since the passage is formed, there is an effect that an ink passage for supplying ink to the outside can be formed only by joining a pair of case members. Further, a first notch formed in each of the pair of case members constituting the first ink cartridge and a first notch formed in each of the pair of case members constituting the third ink cartridge. Therefore, when the second ink cartridge is manufactured, the ink passage can be formed simply by joining the pair of case members.

  Further, according to the set of ink cartridges of the present invention, the pair of case members constituting the first ink cartridge and the pair of case members constituting the third ink cartridge are respectively arranged on one side and the other side. Since the height of the standing wall portion on the side is the same, the height direction size of the standing wall portion on one side and the other side of the first and third ink cartridges is the same. Therefore, since most of the pair of case members from the plate-like portion on one side and the other side to the standing wall portion have the same shape, when molding the case member with a die, most of the die is shared Thus, there is an effect that the cost of manufacturing the mold itself can be reduced.

  Further, according to the set of ink cartridges of the present invention, the height of the standing wall on one side of the pair of case members constituting the first ink cartridge and one of the pair of case members constituting the third ink cartridge The difference between the height of the standing wall portion on the second side and the height of the standing wall portion on the other side of the pair of case members constituting the first ink cartridge and the other height of the pair of case members constituting the third ink cartridge It is different from the difference in the height of the side wall. Therefore, by combining four types of case members, four types of ink cartridges having different sizes of outer shapes can be manufactured. Therefore, there is an effect that the cost can be further reduced when a plurality of ink cartridges are manufactured.

  Further, according to the set of ink cartridges of the present invention, one of the pair of case members constituting the first ink cartridge has the rib standing from the plate-like portion in the height direction of the standing wall portion. The height of the rib corresponds to the difference in height between the standing wall portions of one of the pair of case members constituting the first ink cartridge and one of the pair of case members constituting the third ink cartridge. Although the size of the outer shape is different, the size of the inner space can be the same between the first and third ink cartridges. That is, it is possible to manufacture ink cartridges having the same amount of ink stored in the ink storage chamber but different in outer shape. Here, for example, the black ink is a pigment-based ink. Therefore, when mixed with the color ink, which is a dye-based ink, the color ink is restored to the original state, and a large amount of ink is wasted. Must be discharged. Therefore, it is preferable that the black ink cartridge and the other color ink cartridge be configured to be distinguishable to prevent erroneous mounting of the ink cartridge. In addition, when mainly performing color printing without performing much monochrome printing, an ink cartridge in which a large amount of black ink is stored is unnecessary. According to the present invention, an ink cartridge having the same amount of ink stored in the ink storage chamber but having a different outer shape of the case can be manufactured. Therefore, the black ink is placed in the ink cartridge having a different size of the outer shape. If stored, there is an effect that it can be easily distinguished from other ink cartridges while preventing the amount of stored black ink from becoming extremely large.

  According to the set of ink cartridges of the present invention, the pair of case members are integrally formed with partition walls for forming a storage space for storing a valve mechanism that opens and closes the through hole. There is an effect that a storage space for storing the valve mechanism can be formed simply by joining the case members.

  According to the ink cartridge of the present invention, the substantially rectangular parallelepiped case in which the ink storage chamber is arranged by being joined to each other is constituted by a pair of case members formed of a resin material. The first surface having the largest area is formed by a plate-shaped portion, and the surface adjacent to the first surface is formed by a standing wall portion standing substantially vertically from the outer edge of the plate-shaped portion, and the inside of the case is exposed to the outside. A through hole to be communicated is formed by a notch portion formed at the tip of the standing wall portion. Furthermore, the notch is formed in the same shape for each of the pair of case members. Accordingly, the mold shapes of the pair of case members can be approximated, and the cost required for mold design can be suppressed.

  Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing an appearance of a multi-function device 1 to which an ink cartridge 14 of the present invention is mounted.

  The multi-function device 1 is provided with a printer unit 11 at the bottom, and a scanner unit 12 at the top of the printer unit 11. The multi-function device 1 is an MFD (Multi Function Device) in which a printer unit 11 and a scanner unit 12 are integrally provided, and has various functions such as a printer function, a scanner function, a copy function, and a facsimile function. .

  The multi-function device 1 is mainly connected to a computer (external PC, not shown), and records an image or document on a recording sheet as a recording medium based on image data or document data transmitted from the computer. Is. The multi-function device 1 is connected to an external device such as a digital camera (not shown), and can record image data output from the digital camera on a recording sheet. Further, the multi-function device 1 can use the handset 2 to make a call with the counterpart device and can transmit image data to the counterpart device. Furthermore, the multi-function device 1 includes a slot unit 23 described later. By loading various storage media such as a memory card into the slot unit 23, image data stored in the storage medium can be recorded on a recording sheet. Can also be recorded.

  In the multi-function device 1, the printer unit 11 is configured as an ink jet recording device, and the refill unit 13 that stores ink supplied to a recording head (not shown) that ejects ink droplets in advance is a multi-function device. 1 is provided at the bottom of the front surface. The refill unit 13 is designed to be compact and configured so that the ink cartridge 14 can be easily replaced. The detailed description thereof will be described later.

  The scanner unit 12 includes a document placement unit 15 that functions as an FBS (Flatbed Scanner), and a document cover 16 provided on the document placement unit 15 (upper side in FIG. 1). The document cover 16 includes an automatic document feeder (ADF: Auto Document Feeder, hereinafter referred to as “ADF”) 17, and is attached to the back side (the side of FIG. 1) of the document placement unit 15 through a hinge so as to be freely opened and closed. It has been. Therefore, the document cover 16 is opened and closed by rotating in the direction of arrow A with respect to the document placement unit 15. In the present embodiment, the document placing portion 15 constitutes a part of the casing of the multi-function device 1, and the document cover 16 constitutes a part of the upper surface of the multi-function device 1.

  The document placing portion 15 includes a contact glass plate (not shown) between the document cover 16 and an image reading unit (not shown). The document is disposed between the document cover 16 and the contact glass plate, and the image reading unit reads an image from the document by moving along the contact glass plate below the contact glass plate.

  The document cover 16 includes an ADF 17, and the ADF 17 is configured to continuously convey a predetermined number of documents from the document tray 18 to the discharge tray 19. Since ADF 17 has a known structure, detailed description thereof is omitted. In the present embodiment, the ADF 17 may be omitted. In this configuration, the document cover 16 is opened by the user, and the document is set on the contact glass plate.

  The printer unit 11 includes an image recording unit having an inkjet recording head (not shown), and is configured as an inkjet recording apparatus. The printer unit 11 includes a refill unit 13 on the front side (front side in FIG. 1) of the multi-function device 1 and on the bottom side (lower side in FIG. 1) of the multi-function device 1. That is, the refill unit 13 is built in the front surface 1 a side and the bottom surface 1 b side of the multi-function device 1. In the present embodiment, the refill unit 13 is configured to accommodate and hold four ink cartridges 14, and the ink cartridges 14 respectively store black, yellow, magenta, and cyan inks. The ink of each color stored in the ink cartridge 14 is supplied to the recording head via the ink tube 53 (see FIG. 5).

  In addition, an opening / closing lid 20 that opens and closes an opening 21 formed at an end portion of the front surface 1a (an end portion on the right side of the front surface of FIG. 1) is provided on the front surface (front surface of FIG. 1) of the refill unit 13. The opening / closing lid 20 is configured to be rotatable between a posture in which the refill unit 13 is exposed from the opening 21 by lying down forward (front direction in FIG. 1) and a posture in which the refill unit 13 is accommodated by closing the opening 21. Has been.

  Further, an opening 22 is formed in the center of the front surface 1a of the multi-function device 1, and a paper feed tray (not shown) is disposed inside the opening 22 (in FIG. 1, the paper feed tray has been removed). State is shown). Note that the recording paper sent out from the paper feed tray is sent to the upper side after being sent to the back side, and finally transported to the front side, and an image is recorded on the recording paper while the recording paper is being transported. Is done. Thereafter, the paper is discharged to a paper discharge tray (not shown) provided above the paper feed tray inside the opening 22.

  An operation panel 30 is attached to the upper surface on the front side of the multi-function device 1 (upper front portion in FIG. 1). The operation panel 30 is an operation unit for operating the printer unit 11 and the scanner unit 12, and is provided with various operation keys 31 to 34, a liquid crystal display unit 35, and the like. The various operation keys 31 to 34 arranged on the operation panel 30 are connected to a control device (or a control board, not shown) as a control means for performing main control via a flat cable (not shown). ing. The control device processes commands from the various operation keys 31 to 34 and processes commands from the above-described receiver 2 to control the operation of the multi-function device 1. When a personal computer or the like is connected to the multi-function device 1, the control device operates the multi-function device 1 based on an instruction transmitted from the personal computer in addition to an instruction from the operation panel 30. Control.

  Below the operation panel 30 (downward in FIG. 1), a slot portion 23 into which a storage medium such as various small memory cards can be mounted is provided. Image data is stored in the small memory card, and image data (or information related to the image data) read from the small memory card is displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 35. An arbitrary image displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 35 can be recorded on a recording sheet by operating the operation panel 30.

  Next, the refill unit 13 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the refill unit 13. FIG. 3 is a side view showing a state in which the door 41 of the refill unit 13 is opened. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the refill unit 13 taken along the line IV-IV in FIG. 2, and shows a state where the ink cartridge 14 is mounted. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the refill unit 13 taken along the line VV in FIG. 2, and shows a state where the ink cartridge 14 is mounted. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the door 41 of the refill unit 13. 3 and 4 show a state in which the needle forming member 48 is removed.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the refill unit 13 mainly includes a case 40 into which the ink cartridge 14 is inserted and removed, and a door 41 connected to the case 40. The case 40 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape as a whole, and as shown in FIG. 4, a storage chamber 50 (storage section) that stores and holds the ink cartridge 14 is defined therein. In the present embodiment, the case 40 has four storage chambers 50, and four ink cartridges 14 are inserted into and removed from each storage chamber 50. The inner wall surface shape of each storage chamber 50 is formed so as to define a space corresponding to the outer shape of the ink cartridge 14. When each ink cartridge 14 is attached to the case 40, it is held in the case 40 without rattling. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the case 40 includes a bottom plate portion 42, a pair of side plate portions 43 erected on the left and right sides of the bottom plate portion 42 (the side plate portion 43 on the port side of FIG. 2 is not shown), And a top plate portion 44 arranged so as to span between the side plate portions 43, and further, a partition wall portion 47 (see FIG. 4) for partitioning each storage chamber 50 is provided inside the storage chamber 50. Yes. The number of the partition walls 47 is determined according to the number of ink cartridges 14 accommodated in the case 40, and the position of the partition walls 47 is determined according to the thickness of the ink cartridge 14 in the width direction. As shown in FIG. 4, the partition wall portion 47 is formed in a rib shape standing up and down from the bottom plate portion 42 and the top plate portion 44. The partition wall portion 47 does not need to completely partition each storage chamber 50, so that the partition wall portion 47 protrudes inward from at least one of the bottom plate portion 42 and the top plate portion 44 and partitions the adjacent storage chambers 50. Any shape is possible.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 2, an open notch 40a (opening) is formed on the back side (the starboard side in FIG. 2) of the case 40, and the needle forming member 48 is fitted into the notch 40a. It is. The needle forming member 48 is formed with a needle 49 (extraction member) that extracts ink in the ink cartridge 14 according to the number of ink cartridges 14 stored in the storage chamber 50 of the case 40.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the needle 49 extends in the direction of the opening 45 of the case 40 and along the substantially horizontal direction (ink cartridge mounting direction) with the needle forming member 48 fitted in the notch 40a. ing. When the ink cartridge 14 is mounted in the storage chamber 50, the needle 49 is inserted into the ink supply unit 120 (see FIG. 8) of the ink cartridge 14, and the supply valve 620 of the ink supply mechanism 500 (see FIG. 22). By pressing (see FIG. 22), an ink supply path is formed. The needle 49 communicates with the ink extraction port 52 protruding upward on the back side of the case 40 (right side in FIG. 5), and the ink tube 53 is connected to the ink extraction port 52. The ink tube 53 is connected to an ink jet recording head (not shown), and can supply ink in the ink cartridge 14 to the ink jet recording head.

  A passage 54 for introducing air into the ink cartridge 14 is formed on the side wall of the case 40 above the needle 49 (upper side in FIG. 5). When the ink in the ink cartridge 14 is extracted through the needle 49, the atmosphere corresponding to the extracted ink is supplied into the ink cartridge 14 through the passage 54.

  Further, a protrusion 55 protruding to the ink cartridge 14 side (left side in FIG. 5) is formed above the passage 54. The protrusion 55 is a guide protrusion that is fitted into case fitting grooves 214b2 and 224b2 (see FIG. 8) described later. Further, when the ink cartridge 14 is to be mounted upside down, the protrusion 55 can prevent the ink cartridge 14 from being inserted reversely. A detailed description of the reverse insertion prevention of the ink cartridge 14 will be described later. A detailed description of the internal structure of the ink cartridge 14 will also be described later.

  In addition, an ink remaining amount detection sensor 57 that detects the ink liquid level in the ink cartridge 14 (ink remaining amount) is provided between the needle 49 and the passage 54 on the back side of the case 40. The ink remaining amount detection sensor 57 is a transmissive optical sensor having a light emitting portion 57 a and a light receiving portion 57 b, and is provided corresponding to the number of ink cartridges 14 accommodated in the storage chamber 50. The ink remaining amount detection sensor 57 is provided at a position corresponding to the detection unit 140 (see FIG. 8) of the ink cartridge 14 in a state where the ink cartridge 14 is stored in the storage chamber 50. The light emitting unit 57a and the light receiving unit 57b are disposed at positions where both sides of the detection unit 140 of the ink cartridge 14 accommodated in the ink cartridge 14 can be sandwiched. (See FIG. 18B) The ink remaining amount detection sensor 57 is connected to a control device, and the control device monitors the remaining amount of ink stored in each ink cartridge 14 at all times.

  The top plate portion 44 is provided with ribs 44a, whereby the rigidity of the case 40 is improved. Further, the top plate portion 44 is provided with a swing arm mechanism 44b. The swing arm mechanism 44b is provided with a tension spring between the top plate portion 44 and is always elastically biased toward the door 41 (left front side in FIG. 2, left side in FIGS. 3 to 5). The swing arm mechanism 44b is elastically biased so that the protruding tip portion in the case 41 (storage chamber 50) engages with the locking portions 217a and 227a (see FIG. 8) of the ink cartridge 14, for example. It is configured. Therefore, the ink cartridge 14 attached to the case 40 can be reliably held.

  An opening 45 is provided on the front surface of the case 40 (an insertion port into which the ink cartridge 14 is mounted). The opening 45 is provided corresponding to each storage chamber 50. That is, each storage chamber 50 is provided in the case 40 continuously with each opening 45, and the four ink cartridges 14 are inserted into and removed from each storage chamber 50 through the opening 45.

  The door 41 opens and closes the opening 45 and is provided in each opening 45. The door 41 is opened like the first, third and fourth doors 41 from the port side in FIG. 2 (closed posture) and the second door 41 from the port side in FIG. The opening 45 can be opened and closed by changing the posture between the posture of opening 45 (opening posture). When the door 41 is in the closed position, the ink cartridge 14 is securely held in the storage chamber 50, and when the door 41 is in the open position, the ink cartridge 14 is easily inserted into and removed from the storage chamber 50. Is possible.

  Here, the structure of the door 41 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The door 41 includes a door main body 60, a press holding member 61 provided on the door main body 60, a door lock member 62 (lock bar) that fixes (locks) the door 41 to the case 40, and the door 41 is fixed. And a lock release lever 63 for releasing the released state. The door body 60, the press holding member 61, the door lock member 62, and the lock release lever 63 are each formed of resin.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the door body 60 is formed in an elongated rectangular substantially plate shape. The outer shape of the door body 60 is formed corresponding to the shape of the opening 45 of the case 40. At the lower end portion (lower end portion in FIG. 6) of the door main body 60, a rotation shaft portion 64 that is supported by the lower front portion of the case 40 is formed. Specifically, a bearing portion 42a is formed at the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 42 of the case 40 (see FIGS. 2, 3 and 4), and a rotating shaft portion 64 is rotatably fitted in the bearing portion 42a. ing. Thereby, the door main body 60 can stand up and close the opening 45, and can fall down and open the opening 45.

  A drawer member 65 formed integrally with the door body 60 is provided at the lower end of the door body 60. The drawing member 65 is formed in a substantially L shape and has an extending portion 65a and a bent portion 65b. The extending portion 65a is continuously provided at the lower end portion (rotating shaft portion 64) of the door body 60, and the bent portion 65b is continuously formed at an angle of approximately 90 ° with respect to the extending portion 65a. Is provided.

  When the door 41 is in the closed position (the state shown in FIG. 4), the tip of the bent portion 65b is the mounting surface 51 of the storage chamber 50 (the bottom surface in the storage chamber 50 that contacts the bottom surface of the ink cartridge 14, FIG. 4). (See reference). The door main body 60 rotates about the rotation shaft portion 64 as a rotation center, and thereby the drawer member 65 formed in an L shape also rotates about the rotation shaft portion 64. When the door 41 changes to the open posture (state shown in FIG. 3), the bent portion 65 b of the drawing member 65 rotates around the rotation shaft portion 64. At this time, as the bent portion 65b rotates, the outer wall surface 65c changes from a substantially vertically standing state (the state shown in FIG. 4) to a substantially horizontal state (the state shown in FIG. 3). The length of the extended portion 65a of the drawing member 65 is set to a predetermined dimension. Therefore, when the bent portion 65b is rotated, the outer wall surface 65c is slightly higher than the placement surface 51 of the case 40. And it becomes substantially horizontal with respect to the mounting surface 51.

  The outer wall surface 65 c also functions as a guide surface that guides the ink cartridge 14 onto the placement surface 51 in the storage chamber 50 when the door 41 is in the open posture. Therefore, the drawing member 65 functions as a member for pulling out the ink cartridge 14 from the storage chamber 50, and also functions as a guide member when the ink cartridge 14 is inserted into the storage chamber 50.

  In the present embodiment, two drawer members 65 are provided in each door body 60. That is, each drawing member 65 is arranged to face the door body 60 in the width direction, and is configured to sandwich and support the ink cartridge 14 in the width direction. In the present embodiment, the interval between the drawing members 65 is set smaller than the width direction of the ink cartridge 14.

  On both side surfaces of the press holding member 61, claws 61a project outward from the side surfaces, and the door body 60 is provided with a claw storage portion 60a in which the claw 61a is stored. The claw accommodating portion 60a is configured by a groove extending in a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 6) of the door body 60. Since the claw 61a is slidably fitted into the claw storage portion 60a, the press holding member 61 is supported so as to be able to advance and retreat in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the door body 60. That is, the press holding member 61 is displaced between a protruding posture (state shown in FIG. 3) raised from the inner surface of the door body 60 and a retracted posture (state shown in FIG. 4) retracted from the protruding posture to the door body 60 side. be able to. A coil spring 66 is interposed between the press holding member 61 and the door body 60. Therefore, the pressing holding member 61 is elastically biased so as to always be in the protruding posture.

  When the door 41 is in the closed position, the press holding member 61 contacts the side surface of the ink cartridge 14 and is relatively pressed by the ink cartridge 14 and displaced toward the retracted position (state of FIG. 4). Therefore, the ink cartridge 14 receives the elastic force of the coil spring 66 through the pressing and holding member 61 and is pressed toward the heel side of the case 40 (the heel side in the direction in which the ink cartridge 14 is mounted). Accordingly, the ink cartridge 14 is held in a state of being positioned with respect to the case 40.

  In this embodiment, the press holding member 61 is formed in a flat plate shape, and the wall surface 61b of the press holding member 61 (the surface that comes into contact with the side surface of the ink cartridge 14 when the door 41 is closed) is formed on a flat surface. A pair of protrusions 61c are formed on the wall surface 61b. Therefore, when the door 41 is in the closed position, the protrusions 61c come into contact with and press against the side surface of the ink cartridge 14.

  Further, the press holding member 61 is configured to press slightly below the center position in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 4) of the ink cartridge 14 when in the closed posture. That is, the press holding member 61 is provided at a position where the press holding member 61 contacts and presses below the center position in the vertical direction of the ink cartridge 14. This is for improving the operability when the user operates the door 41. For example, when the press holding member 61 is positioned at the center position or above the center position in the vertical direction of the ink cartridge 14, the user operates the door 41 with the vicinity of the lock release lever 63. The distance from the holding member 61 is reduced. For this reason, the force applied by the coil spring 66 of the pressing and holding member 61 is increased, and a large force is required to operate the door 41. On the other hand, if the position of the press holding member 61 is set to be lower than the center position in the vertical direction of the ink cartridge 14, the distance between the portion operated by the user and the press holding member 61 is increased. Can be operated. Further, when the pressing holding member 61 is positioned too much below the ink cartridge 14 in the vertical direction, the end of the ink cartridge 14 is pressed. It may not be able to hold accurately. However, in this embodiment, since the press holding member 61 is positioned slightly below the center position in the vertical direction of the ink cartridge 14, the ink cartridge 14 can be mounted or held accurately, and smooth with a small force. Can be installed. Note that “slightly below the center position in the vertical direction of the ink cartridge 14” means that the center of the press holding member 61 in the vertical direction is positioned below the center of the ink cartridge 14 in the vertical direction. As long as there is a relationship, a part of the upper end portion of the press holding member 61 (the upper end portion in FIG. 4) may be above the center position of the ink cartridge 14.

  As will be described later, the ink cartridge 14 according to the present embodiment includes an ink supply unit 120 and an air introduction unit 130 on the side surface facing the side surface in contact with the press holding member 61. The air introduction unit 130 includes a valve mechanism having elasticity. That is, urging forces (first and second supply springs 630, 650, and first and second) that press the valves (the supply valve 620 and the atmospheric valve 720) outward so as to block communication between the inside and the outside of the ink cartridge 14. Second atmospheric springs 730, 750). Therefore, the elastic force of the press holding member 61 of the present embodiment is configured to be larger than the elastic force of the valve mechanisms of the ink supply unit 120 and the air introduction unit 130 in order to ensure communication between the ink cartridge 14 and the outside. Has been. Therefore, when the ink cartridge 14 is installed in the storage chamber 50, the ink in the ink cartridge 14 can be reliably supplied and the atmosphere can be reliably introduced into the ink cartridge 14. Further, since the ink cartridge 14 is mounted in the storage chamber 50, the ink supply part 120 is the lower end part and the air introduction part 130 is the upper end part. At a position relatively close to the center position. Accordingly, the direction in which the moment force acts is stabilized as compared with the case where one of the upper and lower ends of the ink cartridge 14 is pressed, so that the ink cartridge 14 can be stably held.

  The door lock member 62 is attached to the upper end portion (upper end portion in FIG. 6) of the door main body 60. The door lock member 62 includes a main shaft portion 62a, a key portion 62b that protrudes inward of the case 40 continuously from the upper end (upper side of FIG. 6), and a lower end (lower side of FIG. 6) of the main shaft portion 62a. It has the seat part 62c (contact part) which protrudes outside the case 40 continuously.

  The door lock member 62 is supported so as to be able to advance and retreat in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 6) with respect to the door body 60. A slide rail 60b extends in the vertical direction at the upper end of the door body 60. Further, the main shaft portion 62a of the door lock member 62 is provided with a slide groove 62d extending in the vertical direction. The slide rail 60b of the door main body 60 is inserted into the slide groove 62d, and the door lock member 62 is configured to be slidable up and down.

  Claws 62e are provided at lower portions of both side surfaces of the main shaft portion 62a on the key portion 62b side. When the door lock member 62 is fitted into the door main body 60, the claw 62 e is accommodated in the claw accommodating portion 60 c provided on the door main body 60. This claw accommodating part 60c is comprised from the groove | channel extended only predetermined length to an up-down direction. Accordingly, when the door lock member 62 slides upward or downward, the claw 62e comes into contact with the inner wall surface of the claw accommodating portion 60c, and the sliding of the door lock member 62 in the vertical direction is restricted.

  The slide range of the door lock member 62 is defined by setting the length of the groove constituting the claw accommodating portion 60c to a predetermined dimension. When the door lock member 62 slides upward with respect to the door body 60 and the claw 62e contacts the upper edge of the inner wall surface of the claw receiving portion 60c, the door lock member 62 protrudes upward from the upper end of the door body 60. Become posture. Further, when the door lock member 62 slides downward with respect to the door main body 60 and the claw 62e comes into contact with the bottom edge of the inner wall surface of the claw receiving portion 60c, the door lock member 62 retreats to the inside of the door main body 60. Become posture. In this specification, the position where the door lock member 62 abuts on the upper edge of the inner wall surface of the claw accommodating portion 60c is defined as a “projecting position”, and the position where the door lock member 62 abuts on the bottom edge of the claw accommodating portion 60c is defined. It is defined as “Evacuation position”.

  Further, a coil spring 67 (elastic member) is interposed between the door lock member 62 and the door body 60. Therefore, the door lock member 62 is elastically biased so as to always protrude upward from the door body 60, that is, in a direction to be displaced to the protruding position.

  Moreover, the upper surface of the key part 62b of the door lock member 62 is an inclined surface inclined downward. Therefore, when the door 41 changes from the open position to the closed position, the upper surface of the door lock member 62 comes into contact with the upper edge of the opening 45 of the case 40, and the door 41 is further rotated to the closed position side. The door lock member 62 retreats to the inside of the door body 60 while being relatively pressed against the upper edge of the opening 45. When the door 41 is completely changed to the closed position, the door lock member 62 protrudes from the door body 60 again, and the key portion 62b comes into contact with and engages with the upper edge portion of the case 40.

  At this time, the key portion 62 b of the door lock member 62 is fitted into a lock member fitting portion 46 (see FIGS. 2 and 5) provided at the upper edge portion of the opening 45 of the case 40. Since the door lock member 62 is elastically biased so as to always protrude from the door main body 60 by the coil spring 67, the door lock member 62 is pressed into the lock member fitting portion 46. The intermediate position is retracted slightly to the retracted position side from the position. Since the door lock member 62 is elastically pressed against the lock member fitting portion 46 whenever the door lock member 62 is in the intermediate position, the door lock member 62 is not easily detached from the lock member fitting portion 46.

  The lock release lever 63 is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and is attached to the upper side of the door body 60 in a state of being fixed to the case 40. Further, the door body 60 includes a storage portion 60 d for storing the lock release lever 63. The storage portion 60d is formed of a recess provided in the door main body 60. As will be described later, the lock release lever 63 is fitted into the storage portion 60d when the lock release lever 63 is displaced.

  A support pin 63 a is provided at the lower end of the lock release lever 63. On the other hand, the door body 60 is provided with a pin support hole 60e into which the support pin 63a is fitted. When the support pin 63a is fitted into the pin support hole 60e, the lock release lever 63 is configured to be rotatable about the support pin 63a. Specifically, the lock release lever 63 stands upright to be substantially parallel to the outer surface of the door body 60, and to be inclined substantially 45 degrees (the state of the right door 41 in FIG. 2). Further, it is configured to freely rotate and displace between a posture lying down substantially horizontally (the state of the second door 41 from the right side in FIG. 2). In this specification, the position of the lock release lever 63 when stored in the storage portion 60d is defined as the “storage position”, and the position of the lock release lever 63 when the lock release lever 63 is inclined at approximately 45 °. Is defined as a “neutral position”, and the position of the lock release lever 63 when lying down approximately horizontally is defined as a “falling position”.

  The lower end portion of the lock release lever 63 is an interlock cam 63b, and the interlock cam 63b is for sliding the door lock member 62 up and down when the position of the lock release lever 63 changes. By providing the interlocking cam 63b, the door lock member 62 slides from the protruding position to the retracted position through the intermediate position when the lock release lever 63 is rotated from the retracted position to the lying position through the neutral position. . In other words, when the door lock member 62 is in the projecting position, the lock release lever 63 is disposed in the storage position, the door 41 is closed, and the door lock member 62 contacts the lock member fitting portion 46 of the case 40. In the contact state, the lock release lever 63 can be freely displaced between the storage position and the neutral position. At this time, the position of the center of gravity is set so that the lock release lever 63 is always displaced to the neutral position by its own weight. Since the lock release lever 63 is in the neutral position by its own weight, the operability to the lying position can be improved.

  Here, the operating point of the lock release lever 63 will be described. The interlock cam 63 b of the lock release lever 63 is in contact with the seat 62 c of the door lock member 62. In the state where the door 41 is closed (the state shown in FIG. 4), the lock release lever 63 tries to rotate in a direction of pressing the door lock member 62 further downward via the interlock cam 63b. However, since the door lock member 62 is always elastically biased upward by the coil spring 67, the door lock member 62 is not displaced only by the action of its own weight of the lock release lever 63. Maintained in position.

  However, when the lock release lever 63 is forcibly turned, for example, when a user who wants to replace the ink cartridge 14 operates and turns the lock release lever 63, the lock release lever 63 is in the fall position. Until it is displaced. When the unlocking lever 63 is displaced to the lying down position, the interlocking cam 63b is rotationally displaced about the support pin 63a, and pushes down the seat 62c of the door lock member 62. As a result, the door lock member 62 moves downward against the elastic force of the coil spring 67 and is displaced to the retracted position. When the door lock member 62 is displaced to the retracted position, the door 41 is unlocked, and the door 41 changes from the closed position to the open position.

  Since the door lock member 62 is always subjected to the elastic force of the coil spring 67, if there is no turning force acting on the lock release lever 63, in other words, if the user releases the lock release lever 63, the door lock member 62 The lock member 62 is in the most protruding posture from the door body 60, and the lock release lever 63 is forcibly displaced to the storage position. That is, when the door 41 is in the open posture, the lock release lever 63 is in a posture that is almost accommodated in the door body 60. Accordingly, when the ink cartridge 14 is replaced, the lock lever 92 is almost housed in the door body 60. Therefore, the rotation shaft 64 is used as the center of rotation until the door 41 is almost horizontal. Since it can be rotated, the user can easily replace the ink cartridge 14. Further, the two protrusions 61 c provided on the wall surface 61 b of the press holding member 61 cooperate with the guide portion between the bent portions 65 b to act as a guide when the ink cartridge 14 is stored in the storage chamber 50. To do. That is, when the ink cartridge 14 is inserted into the storage chamber 50, the user places the bottom surface of the ink cartridge 14 on the ridge 61c and places the tip portion of the ink cartridge 14 between the bent portions 65b, as it is. What is necessary is just to push 14 toward the storage chamber 50 direction. Further, when extracting the ink cartridge 14 from the storage chamber 50, the user only has to extract until the bottom surface of the ink cartridge 14 reaches between the bent portion 65b and the protrusion 61c.

  When the multi-function device 1 is in a normal use state, the door 41 of the refill unit 13 is closed, and the lock release lever 63 is disposed at the neutral position. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 1, when the opening / closing lid 20 is opened when the ink cartridge 14 is replaced, the lock release lever 63 is tilted to the front side. For this reason, there is an advantage that the user can easily operate the lock release lever 63. By the way, as shown in FIG. 1, since the refill unit 13 is arrange | positioned in the front surface 1a of the multi-function apparatus 1, if the lock release lever 63 is arrange | positioned in the neutral position (if it inclines to the front side). In order to accommodate the refill unit 13, a wide space needs to be secured in the multi-function device 1. Therefore, the refill unit 13 needs to be disposed inward from the periphery of the opening 21, and therefore, the outer dimensions of the multi-function device 1 may be increased. However, in the present embodiment, the lock release lever 63 can freely rotate between the neutral position and the storage position when the door 41 is in the closed position with respect to the case 40, and therefore, the refill unit 13. May be arranged near the periphery of the opening 21. Even if the refill unit 13 is arranged at the periphery of the opening 21, when the opening / closing lid 20 is closed, the inner wall surface of the opening / closing lid 20 comes into contact with the lock release lever 63, and the lock is released when the opening / closing lid 20 is completely closed. This is because the lever 63 is displaced to the storage position while being pushed by the opening / closing lid 20. Therefore, in this embodiment, a compact design of the multi-function device 1 is possible.

  Next, the ink cartridge 14 used in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The ink cartridge 14 is for storing ink in advance, and each ink cartridge 14 stores ink of each color of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. However, the structure of each ink cartridge 14 is formed so that only the ink cartridge 14 that stores black ink is slightly thicker than the ink cartridge 14 that stores other color inks. This is because black ink is generally the most demanded and consumed in large quantities, and black ink is composed of pigment-based ink and color ink is composed of dye-based ink. This is because when ink is mixed, a large amount of color ink must be consumed for the recovery operation. Therefore, the outer shape of the black ink is formed large so that the color ink and the black ink can be visually confirmed. Note that the structure of the ink cartridge 14 for storing the color ink is all formed in the same shape.

  First, the color ink cartridge 14 in which the color ink is stored will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the color ink cartridge 14. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the color ink cartridge 14. 9A and 9B are diagrams showing the protector 300. FIG. 9A is a top view of the protector 300 in the IXa view of FIG. 8, and FIG. FIG. In the following description, the X direction indicates the longitudinal direction of the ink cartridge 14 (case 200, ink reservoir 100), and the Y direction indicates the ink cartridge 14 (case 200, ink reservoir) orthogonal to the X direction. 100) indicates the height direction, and the Z direction indicates the width direction (thickness direction) of the ink cartridge 14 (case 200, ink reservoir 100) orthogonal to the X direction and the Y direction. Further, an arrow B shown in FIG. 8 is parallel to the X direction indicating the longitudinal direction of the ink cartridge 14 and also indicates the mounting direction when the ink cartridge 14 is mounted on the refill unit 13.

  As shown in FIG. 7, a color ink cartridge 14 is attached to a case 200 that covers substantially the entire ink reservoir 100 (see FIG. 8) that stores ink, and the ink cartridge 14 is transported. And a protector 300 that protects the ink reservoir 100 during the operation. As apparent from FIG. 7, the case 200 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape including a pair of maximum surfaces 210a and 220a facing each other. In the present embodiment, all members included in the ink reservoir 100, the case 200, the protector 300, and the ink cartridge 14 described later are made of a resin material, and are made of metal. Since it has no material, it can be incinerated during disposal. For example, examples of the resin material include nylon, polyethylene, and polypropylene.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the ink reservoir 100 includes a frame portion 110 that forms an ink reservoir chamber 111 that stores ink (an internal space including the ink reservoir chamber 111), and ink stored in the frame portion 110. In order to detect an ink supply unit 120 that supplies to the multi-function device 1 (see FIG. 1), an air introduction unit 130 that introduces air into the frame unit 110, and a remaining amount of ink stored in the frame unit 110. A detection unit 140 (irradiated unit) provided in the frame unit 110, an ink dispensing unit 150 that dispenses ink into the frame unit 110, and both sides of the frame unit 110 in order to form an ink storage chamber in the frame unit 110 (see FIG. 8 and 2 films) are mainly provided. The description of the frame unit 110, the ink supply unit 120, the air introduction unit 130, the detection unit 140, the ink dispensing unit 150, the film 160, and the manufacturing process of the ink reservoir 100 will be described later.

  The case 200 includes two case members 210 and 220 that sandwich the ink reservoir 100 from above and below (up and down, Z direction in FIG. 8). The first case member 210 is a lower side of the ink reservoir 100 in FIG. The second case member 220 is a member that covers the upper side surface of the ink reservoir 100 in FIG. The first and second case members 210 and 220 are made of a resin material and are manufactured by injection molding. Note that the depths of the first and second case members 210 and 220 (the length in the upward direction in FIG. 8 (the length in the Z direction)) are substantially equal, and the sum of these depths is the ink storage. It is formed so as to be approximately equal to the thickness of the body 100. Therefore, since the distance between the ink reservoir 100 and the inner surface of the case 200 is shortened (the gap is narrowed), even if pressure is applied from the outside to the inside of the case 200, the deformation amount of the case 200 is reduced. The case 200 can be prevented from being damaged.

  The first case member 210 includes a plate-like portion that forms the maximum surface 210a, and standing wall portions 210b to 210b that are erected in a substantially vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 8, Z direction) from the outer edge portions of the four sides of the plate-like portion. 210e. In the standing wall portions 210d to 210e, the standing wall on the protector 300 side of the first case member 210 is the standing wall portion 210b, and the standing wall disposed to face the standing wall portion 210b is the standing wall portion 210c, and the standing wall portions 210c and 210b The standing walls connected in series are the standing wall portions 210d and 210e (the right side in FIG. 8 is the standing wall portion 210d and the left side in FIG. 8 is the standing wall portion 210d).

  Two case notches 211 and 212 for exposing the ink supply part 120 and the air introduction part 130 to the outside of the case 200 are formed on the standing wall part 210 b of the first case member 210. The case notches 211 and 212 are formed in a substantially semicircular shape from the tip of the standing wall 210b, and the case notch 211 on the right front side in FIG. 8 is a notch corresponding to the ink supply part 120. The case notch 212 is a notch corresponding to the air introduction part 130. Further, a rectangular case notch 213 cut into a rectangular shape is formed between the case notch 211 and the case notch 212, and this detects the remaining amount of ink up to the position where the detector 140 is sandwiched. It is a notch for inserting the sensor 57 (see FIG. 5). A contact groove 211 a that contacts the ink supply unit 120 is formed on the inner surface of the first case member 210 that is connected to the case notch 211, and the inner surface that is connected to the case notch 212 of the first case member 210 is formed. A contact groove 212b that contacts the air introduction part 130 is formed on the side surface. By providing the contact grooves 212a and 212b, the ink reservoir 100 can be easily aligned with the first case member 210.

  Further, the first case member 210 has two case protrusions 214a, which protrude in the protector 300 direction (the left front direction in FIG. 8, the X direction) from the surface (the standing wall part 210b) on which the case notches 211 to 213 are formed. 214b is formed. The case protrusions 214a and 214b are formed on both sides of the first case member 210 (the right front side end portion in FIG. 8 and the port side end portion in FIG. 8) side by side in the Y direction so as to sandwich the case cutout portions 211 to 213. The ink supply part 120 side (right front side in FIG. 8) is the case protrusion 214a, and the air introduction part 130 side (port side in FIG. 8) is the case protrusion 214b. In addition, the case protrusion 214a extends from the portion connected to the outer surface of the standing wall portion 210d of the first case member 210 toward the tip (in the protector 300 direction, the left front side in FIG. 8) in the case notch portions 211 to 213 (first direction). It has an inclined surface 214a2 inclined in the case member 210 inner direction. When the ink cartridge 14 is mounted on the multi-function device 1 (see FIG. 1), the case protrusion 214a is mounted on the lower side. Therefore, when the ink cartridge 14 is mounted, when the inclined surface 214a2 comes into contact with the bottom wall portion 41 of the refill case 13, the ink cartridge 14 is smoothly guided to a predetermined mounting position by the inclination.

  The case protrusion 214a is formed with a case protrusion 214a1 cut into a rectangular shape on the inner surface on the case notches 211 to 213 side. The case protrusion 214b is formed with a case protrusion notch 214b1 cut into a rectangular shape on the inner surface on the case notches 211 to 213 side. The case protruding cutouts 214a1 and 214b1 are provided to prevent the protector 300 from being naturally attached and detached when the protector 300 is attached to the case 200. Protrusions 330a1 and 330b1 of the protector 300 described later (See FIG. 9).

  Further, the case protrusion 214b is formed with a case fitting groove 214b2 as a fitting portion into which a first protector fitting portion 320 (see FIG. 9) of the protector 300 described later is fitted. The case fitting groove 214b2 is formed from the tip of the case protrusion 214b (the end on the protector 300 side) to a part of the standing wall 210e.

  In addition, the first case member 210 protrudes in the direction of the second case member 220 (Z direction) in the vicinity of the standing wall portion 210d on the ink supply unit 120 side (right front side in FIG. 8), and the ink enclosed in the case 200 A rod member 215a for positioning the storage body 100 and a projection in the direction of the second case member 220 (Z direction) in the vicinity of the standing wall portion 210e on the atmosphere introduction portion 130 side (the port side of FIG. 8) are enclosed in the case 200 Bar members 215b and 215c for positioning the ink reservoir 100 to be formed are formed. Since the ink reservoir 100 is positioned by the three portions of the rod members 215a to 215c, it is possible to prevent the ink reservoir 100 from being attached in the wrong direction.

  The second case member 220 has a plate-like portion that forms the maximum surface 220a and standing wall portions 220b to 220b that are erected in a substantially vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 8, Z direction) from the outer edge portions of the four sides of the plate-like portion. 220e. In the standing wall portions 220b to 220e, the standing wall on the protector 300 side of the second case member 220 is the standing wall portion 220b, and the standing wall opposed to the standing wall portion 220b is the standing wall portion 220c, and the standing wall portions 220c and 220b The standing walls connected in series are the standing wall portions 220d and 220e (the right side in FIG. 8 is the standing wall portion 220d and the left side in FIG. 8 is the standing wall portion 220d).

  The second case member 220 has a substantially symmetrical structure with the first case member 210, and, like the first case member 210, three case notches 221 to 223 are formed in the standing wall 220 b. A contact groove 221a connected to the case notch 221 and a contact groove 222a connected to the case notch 222 are formed. The case notches 221 and 222 are formed in the same shape (substantially semicircular shape) as the case notches 211 and 212 of the first case member 210, and the case notch 223 is the same as the case notch 213 of the first case member 210. It is formed in the same shape (substantially rectangular shape). In addition, case protrusions 224a and 224b are formed on both sides of the case notches 221 to 223, and the case protrusions 224a are directed from the portion connected to the outer surface of the standing wall portion 210d of the second case member 220 toward the tip. In addition, it has an inclined surface 224a2 that is inclined in the direction of the case notches 221 to 223. The case protrusion 224a is formed with a case protrusion notch 224a1 (not shown). The case protrusion 224b has a case protrusion notch 224b1 and a part of the standing wall 220e from the tip of the case protrusion 224b. A case fitting groove 224b2 is formed over the entire area. Further, the second case member 220 penetrates in the first case member 210 direction (Z direction) corresponding to the position where the rod members 215a to 215c of the first case member 210 are formed, and the rod members 215a to 215c Fitting hole portions 225a to 225c (not shown) having holes to be fitted are provided.

  As described above, in the case 200, the first case member 210 and the second case member 220 are formed in substantially the same shape. When the ink reservoir 100 is sandwiched, the case notches 211 and 221 cause ink to flow. A substantially circular through-hole that exposes a part of the supply part 120 to the outside is formed, and a substantially circular through-hole that exposes a part of the air introduction part 130 to the outside is formed by the case notches 212 and 222. Through holes through which the ink remaining amount detection sensor 57 (see FIG. 5) can be inserted are formed on both sides of the detection unit 140 (upper and lower sides in FIG. 8, both sides in the Z direction). The Further, the case protruding portion 214a and the case protruding portion 224a prevent ink smear of the refill unit 13, prevent the cartridge from being attached to the refill unit 13 in a wrong posture, and prevent damage to the ink supply unit 120 and the air introduction unit 130. And a protrusion formed from the case protrusion 214a and the case protrusion 224a by the case protrusion 214b and the case protrusion 224b. A protrusion ("second protrusion" or "one protrusion") that contributes to preventing the above-described erroneous posture mounting and preventing damage to the ink supply unit 120 or the like is formed. These protrusions will be described in detail later. As is apparent from FIG. 8, the ink supply unit 120 is positioned closer to the projections of the case projections 214a and 224a than the projections of the case projections 214b and 224b. Further, a through hole into which the protruding portion 330a1 (see FIG. 9) of the protector 300 is gently inserted is formed by the case protruding notches 214a1 and 224a1, and the protruding portion 330b1 (see FIG. 9) of the protector 300 is formed by the case protruding notches 214b1 and 224b1. Is formed, and a substantially rectangular parallelepiped fitting groove into which the first protector fitting portion 320 (see FIG. 9) of the protector 300 is fitted is formed by the case fitting grooves 214b2 and 224b2.

  As is clear from the above description, the first case member 210 and the second case member 220 have not only the overall appearance, but also case protrusions 214a, 214b, 224a, 224b and case notches 211-213, 221- Details such as 223 are also formed to have the same shape. Accordingly, when the first case member 210 and the second case member 220 are resin-molded, these mold shapes are approximated, so that the cost for mold design can be suppressed.

  Next, the outer shape of the case 200 will be described. The first and second case members 210 and 220 are each provided with an upright wall portion 210d in a direction (Y direction) orthogonal to the longitudinal direction B (X direction connecting the starboard side in FIG. 8 and the left front side in FIG. 8, arrow B in FIG. 8). 210e, 220d, 220e (both side surfaces) are formed in a concave shape, and a step is formed with respect to the maximum surfaces 210a, 220a (surface) of the first and second case members 210, 220. At the step portion, the first and second case members 210 and 220 are welded, and the ink reservoir 110 is fixed to the case 200. As for the stepped portion, the stepped portion on the ink supply unit 120 side (right front side in FIG. 8) is the first case welded portion 216, 226, and the stepped portion on the air introduction unit 130 side (left port side in FIG. 8) is the second case welded. Parts 217 and 227.

  In the following description, the longitudinal direction B (the direction parallel to the X direction) of the first and second case members 210 and 220 is the longitudinal direction of the ink cartridge 14, the longitudinal direction of the ink reservoir 100, and the longitudinal direction of the case 200. It means direction.

  Here, the first and second case welded portions 226 and 227 of the second case member 220 will be described. The first case welded portion 226 is connected to the same plane as the case protruding portion 224a, and on the opposite side of the case protruding portion 224a, a concave portion 226a formed in a concave shape in the inner direction of the second case member 220, When the ink cartridge 14 is removed from the refill unit 13 (see FIG. 1), an engaging portion 226b that engages with the drawer member 65 (see FIG. 6) of the door 41 is provided. The concave portion 226a is a region for securing a swing range when the drawing member 65 rotates. The case welded portion 227 has a locking portion 227a formed in a concave shape at a substantially intermediate position in the longitudinal direction B of the second case member 220, and the locking portion 227a is attached to the refill unit 13, This is a portion that engages with the swing arm mechanism 44b (see FIG. 2).

  Although not described in detail, the first case member 210 also has a recess 216a (not shown) formed in the same shape as the recess 226a, the engagement portion 226b, and the locking portion 227a of the second case member 220. An engaging portion 216b (not shown) and a locking portion 217a are formed.

  Next, the protector 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing the protector 300, FIG. 9A is a top view of the protector 300 as viewed in IXa of FIG. 8, and FIG. 9B is IXb-IXb of FIG. 9A. It is sectional drawing of the protector 300 in a line. The protector 300 is a member for protecting the ink supply unit 100, particularly the ink supply unit 120 and the air introduction unit 130, when the ink cartridge 14 is shipped. The protector 300 is made of a resin material and is manufactured by injection molding.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the protector 300 has a protector through-hole 310 formed at a location corresponding to the bottom surface of the air introduction part 130 (the port side of FIG. 8). This is because a valve opening portion 721a (see FIG. 33) for operating the atmospheric valve 720 protrudes outward from the atmospheric introduction portion 130, and the protector through-hole 310 is used to protect the valve opening portion 721a. Is formed.

  As shown in the top view of FIG. 9A, the case fitting grooves 214b2 and 224b2 (see FIG. 8) are formed near the end of the protector 300 on the protector through hole 310 side (left side of FIG. 9A). A first protector fitting portion 320 to be fitted into the fitting groove is formed. Further, in the vicinity of the end on the side opposite to the side on which the first protector fitting portion 320 is formed (the right side in FIG. 9A), through-holes formed by case protruding notches 214a1 and 224a1 (see FIG. 8). And a second protector fitting portion 330a for fixing the protector 300 to the case 200 is formed. Between the first protector fitting portion 320 and the protector through hole 310, a case protruding notch 214b1 is formed. , 224b1 (see FIG. 8), a second protector fitting portion 330b is formed for fitting the protector 300 to the case 200.

  Further, in a substantially intermediate position in the longitudinal direction C (the Y direction in FIGS. 8 and 9) of the protector 300, the inside of a through hole formed by the case notches 213 and 223 and the side wall of the detection unit 140 (see FIG. 8). Protector loose insertion portions 340a and 340b are formed which are loosely inserted. The protector loosely inserted portions 340a and 340b are connected to both side walls (upper and lower side walls in FIG. 9A) formed in parallel to the longitudinal direction C, and the upper side (FIG. 9A) on the front side of FIG. It is formed to project in the X direction (on the ink reservoir 100 side). A plurality of ribs are erected from the bottom surface of the protector 300 to maintain the strength of the protector 300.

  The first protector fitting portion 320 is disposed so as to extend in a direction parallel to the direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 9A and the X direction) orthogonal to the longitudinal direction C of the protector 300, and extends from the bottom wall of the protector 300. The protector standing wall 321 is erected, and two protector standing walls 322 are connected from the protector standing wall 321 to the side wall opposite to the protector through hole 310 (left side in FIG. 9A). As shown in FIG. 9B, the protector standing wall 322 includes an upper portion formed in parallel with the protector standing wall 321 from the upper end portion (the upper end portion in FIG. 9B) of the first protector fitting portion 320, and the first protector standing wall 322. The protector fitting portion 320 includes a lower portion connected from a substantially intermediate position in the protruding direction (upward in FIG. 9B, X direction) to the side wall of the protector 300, and has a step.

  Therefore, when fitted in the fitting groove formed by the case fitting grooves 214b2 and 224b2 (see FIG. 8), the protector standing wall 321 and the upper part of the protector standing wall 322 are inserted into the fitting groove. When the first protector fitting portion 320 is inserted into the fitting groove, both ends of the protector standing wall 321 extending in the Z direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction C (Y direction) and the protector standing wall 322 in the longitudinal direction C It is inserted while being regulated by the end portion. Here, if the first protector fitting part 320 is formed in substantially the same shape as the fitting groove formed by the case fitting grooves 214b2 and 224b2 (see FIG. 8), it takes time to mount the protector 300. If the first protector fitting portion 320 is extremely small with respect to the fitting groove, the protector 300 cannot be positioned in the mounting direction. However, insertion is performed by the protector standing walls 321 and 322 while being restricted by one surface (the plane of the protector standing wall 321) and four points (both ends of the protector standing wall 321 and two ends of the protector standing wall 322). In addition, it is possible to prevent erroneous mounting while improving the mountability of the protector 300.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, in the second protector fitting portions 330a and 330b, the protruding portions 330a1 and 330b1 protruding in directions away from each other are the tip portions of the second protector fitting portions 330a and 330b (FIG. 9B). ) Are formed at the upper end), and rod portions 330a2 and 330b2 formed in a substantially rod shape from the tip portion toward the bottom surface of the protector 300 (downward in FIG. 9B). Further, the rod portions 330a2 and 330b2 have elasticity because the protector 300 is formed of a resin material, and the second protector fitting portions 330a and 330b are elastically deformed inward to attach / detach the protector 300. Is done.

  Here, the black ink cartridge 14 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the black ink cartridge 14. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the black ink cartridge 14.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the black ink cartridge 14 has a larger outer shape (thickness (length in the Z direction)) than the color ink cartridge 14. Specifically, the second case member 220 constituting the case 1200 is the same as the second case member 220 for the collar, and the first case member 1210 constituting the case 1200 becomes the first case member 210 for the collar. On the other hand, it is formed thick (long in the Z direction). Since the ink reservoir 100 has a sufficient capacity to store black ink, the ink reservoir 100 has the same shape as the color ink reservoir 100 and is a common component. The protector 1300 is formed corresponding to the case 1200, and is thicker in the vertical direction (Z direction) than the protector 300. Therefore, the description of the black ink cartridge 14 will be described for the first case member 1210, and the description of the second case member 220, the ink reservoir 100, and the protector 1300 will be omitted. Further, the first case member 1210 is different only in depth (thickness in the vertical direction (length in the Z direction) in FIG. 11) from the first case member 210, and the other configurations are configured in the same shape. Therefore, detailed description is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the first case member 1210 stands in a substantially vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 11, Z direction) from the plate-like portion that forms the maximum surface 1210 a and the outer edge portions of the four sides of the plate-like portion. It is comprised with the standing wall part 1210b-1210e provided. In the standing wall portions 1210b to 1210e, the standing wall on the protector 1300 side of the first case member 1210 is the standing wall portion 1210b, and the standing wall opposed to the standing wall portion 1210b is the standing wall portion 1210c, and the standing wall portions 1210c and 1210b The standing walls connected in series are standing wall portions 1210d and 1210e (the right side in FIG. 11 is the standing wall portion 1210d and the left side in FIG. 11 is the standing wall portion 1210d). The black ink cartridge 14 is formed so that the standing wall heights of the standing wall portions 1210b to 1210e are approximately twice the standing wall height of the standing wall portions 210b to 210e of the collar first case member 210. The thickness of the ink cartridge 14 is increased.

  Similar to the first case member 210, the first case member 1210 includes a case cutout formed in a substantially semicircular shape on the standing wall 1210b in order to expose the ink supply unit 120 and the air introduction unit 130 to the outside of the case 200. Portions 1211 and 1212 are formed, and a case cutout portion 1213 cut into a rectangular shape is formed between the case cutout portion 1211 and the case cutout portion 1212. Further, two case projecting portions 1214a and 1214b are formed on both sides of the first case member 1210, and the case projecting portion 1214a has an inclined surface 1214a2. The first case member 1210 is formed with rod members 1215a, 1215b, and 1215c for positioning the ink reservoir 100.

  Further, the first case member 1210 is provided with ribs 1218 on substantially the entire inner surface thereof (substantially the entire maximum surface 1210a). The ribs 1218 are formed by increasing the outer shape of the first case member 1210 relative to the first case member 210 (the standing wall portions 210b to 210e of the first case member 210 and the standing wall portions 1210b to 1210e of the first case member 1210, and The height difference), and protrudes in the Z direction toward the ink reservoir 100 side. By providing the rib 1218, a space (gap) formed between the ink reservoir 100 and the first case 1210 can be filled. Therefore, the strength can be maintained against the pressure from the outside of the case 1200.

  Further, the black ink cartridge 14 can be distinguished from the other ink cartridges 14 by making the outer shape of the black ink cartridge 14 larger than the outer shapes of the other color ink cartridges 14. Further, since black has a darker color than other colors, it is not preferable that the black is erroneously mounted and used in the refill unit 13. However, since the ink cartridge 14 for black is formed to have a large outer shape, it can be distinguished from the other ink cartridges 14, so that the wrong mounting can be reduced. Further, since the storage chamber 50 in the refill unit 13 is formed according to the size of each ink cartridge 14, the black ink cartridge 14 is mounted in the storage chamber 50 corresponding to the color ink cartridge 14. Never happen.

  In the black ink cartridge 14, the first case member 1210 and the second case member 220 have different thicknesses in the vertical direction (Z direction). Therefore, the black ink cartridge 14 is shifted from the center position in the vertical direction (biased position). In addition, the ink supply unit 120, the air introduction unit 130, and the detection unit 140 are located.

  Next, the ink cartridge 14 for large capacity black will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 12 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the large-capacity black ink cartridge 14. FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view of the large capacity black ink cartridge 14.

  As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the large-capacity black ink cartridge 14 has a larger outer shape (longer in the Z direction) than the color and black ink cartridges 14. Specifically, the standing wall height of the standing wall portions 2220b to 2220e of the second case member 2220 is formed to be approximately twice the standing wall height of the standing wall portions 220b to 220e of the second case member 220 to constitute the case 2200. The second case member 2220 is only made thicker than the second case member 220 for color and black. Further, the first case member 2210 constituting the case 2200 only has the rib 1218 of the first case member 1210 for black eliminated. Furthermore, the ink reservoir 2100 is only thickened so as to have a larger capacity than the color and black ink reservoirs 100. Therefore, a detailed description of the large capacity black ink cartridge 14 is omitted. The number assigned to the large-capacity black ink cartridge 14 is obtained by adding 2000 to the number assigned to the color ink cartridge 14. In addition, since the thickness in the vertical direction (Z direction) of the first case member 2210 and the second case member 2220 is substantially the same, the ink supply unit 2120, the air introduction unit 2130, and the detection unit 2140 are located at the center in the vertical direction. Will be located.

  Corresponding to the three types of ink cartridges described above, the refill unit 13 of the multi-function device 1 includes a plurality of storage chambers 50 for storing the color ink cartridges 14, a black ink cartridge 14, and a large ink cartridge 14. One storage chamber 50 that selectively stores the capacity black ink cartridge 14 (the internal space of the storage chamber 50 has a size corresponding to the large capacity black ink cartridge 14). It is desirable. This is because, in general, text printing using only black ink is more frequent than color printing. However, the refill unit 13 is provided with a plurality of storage chambers 50 for storing the color ink cartridges 14 and a single storage chamber 50 for storing the black ink cartridges 14 for users who do not frequently print text. A configured multifunction device 1 may be provided. This will be explained again later.

  Next, the ink reservoir 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 14 is a view showing the ink reservoir 100, FIG. 14 (a) is a front view of the ink reservoir 100, and FIG. 14 (b) is a rear view of the ink reservoir 100. FIG. Note that the state of the ink reservoir 100 shown in FIG. 14 is a posture in which the ink cartridge 14 is mounted on the multi-function device 1 (see FIG. 1). This is a posture in which the longitudinal direction (X direction) and the thickness direction (Z direction) of the ink cartridge 14 (ink reservoir 100) are horizontal, as shown in FIG. 130 and the detection unit 140 are positioned on the side, the ink supply unit 120 is positioned on the bottom side, and the atmosphere introduction unit 130 is positioned on the ceiling side. The ink reservoir 2100 is different from the ink reservoir 100 only in thickness (length in the X direction), and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, the ink reservoir 100 mainly includes the frame part 110, the ink supply part 120, the air introduction part 130, the detection part 140, the ink dispensing part 150, and the film 160. The ink reservoir 100 is configured as a substantially hexahedron having a flat shape. The pair of surfaces having the largest area of the hexahedron are surfaces that form the front side and the back side of the ink reservoir 100 shown in FIG. 14, and the four directions connect the front side surface and the back side surface. It is comprised by the approximately six surfaces with the side surface (side wall) located in this. It should be noted that the pair of surfaces that are the maximum area of the ink reservoir 100 are parallel to the pair of maximum surfaces 210 a and 220 a of the case 200 when loaded in the case 200. Further, since the film 160 is welded to both the front side and the back side of the frame part 110, the thickness (the length in the Z direction) of the flat ink storage body 100 is covered with a plate material. Can be made thinner.

  First, the frame unit 110 will be described in detail. Moreover, the frame part 110 is comprised from the resin material, and is manufactured by injection molding.

  As shown in FIG. 14 (a), on the front side of the frame portion 110, there are an outer periphery weld portion 400a for welding the film 160 in the vicinity of the outer edge portion, and a plurality of inner peripheries provided inside the outer periphery weld portion 400a. Welded portions 411a to 417a are formed. The outer periphery welded portion 400 a is a standing wall that defines an internal space of the frame portion 100 (a space on the first chamber 111 a side of the ink storage chamber 111). In addition, as shown in FIG. 14A, the blackened tip portions of the inner circumference welded portions (ribs or first ribs) 411a to 417a are welded surface portions (rib fixed portions or first rib fixed portions). The front end (blacked portion) of the outer periphery welded portion 400a is the welded surface portion (adhered portion) at the periphery of the first opening 112a. The film 160 is welded to the weld surface portion by ultrasonic welding.

  As shown in FIG. 14 (b), on the back side of the frame portion 110, there are an outer periphery weld portion 400b for welding the film 160 in the vicinity of the outer edge portion, and a plurality of inner peripheries provided inside the outer periphery weld portion 400b. Welded portions 411a to 417b are formed. The outer periphery welded part 400 b is a standing wall that defines the internal space of the frame part 100. The outer periphery welded portion 400b is a standing wall that defines an internal space of the frame portion 100 (a space on the second chamber 111b side of the ink storage chamber 111). In addition, as shown in FIG. 14B, the blackened tip portions of the inner circumference welded portions (ribs or second ribs) 411b to 417b are welded surface portions (rib fixed portions or second rib fixed portions). The rear end (blacked portion) of the external welded portion 400b is a welded surface portion (adhered portion) at the periphery of the opening. The film 160 is welded to the welded portion by ultrasonic welding.

  Further, the inner side of the outer periphery welded portions 400a and 400b is an ink storage chamber 111 in which ink is stored. The area on the front side shown in FIG. 14A is the first chamber 111 a of the ink storage chamber 111, and the area on the back side shown in FIG. 14B is the second chamber 111 b of the ink storage chamber 111. 14A is the first opening 112a of the frame portion 110, and the outer periphery welding portion 400b shown in FIG. 14B is the second opening 112b of the frame portion 110. .

  The frame part 110 mainly communicates with the ink supply part 120 and supplies the ink stored in the ink storage chamber 111 to the outside. (See FIGS. 14A and 14B.) And an atmosphere communication path forming section 430 (see FIG. 14A) for introducing the atmosphere into the ink storage chamber 111 and the substantially central portion of the frame section 110 (or the ink storage chamber 111). And a plate-like connection forming portion 440 (see FIGS. 14A and 14B) that connects the vicinity of the air introduction portion 130 and the vicinity of the ink dispensing portion 150, and communicates with the ink dispensing portion 150. In addition, the ink storage chamber 111 includes a dispensing path forming unit 450 (see FIG. 14B) for dispensing ink. Here, the connection forming portion 440 partitions the first chamber 111a and the second chamber 111b of the ink storage chamber 111 in a state where they are in communication with each other, and the film 160 welded to the outer periphery welding portion 400a extends. A connecting plate extending between a virtual plane R (not shown) and a virtual plane S (not shown) on which the film 160 welded to the outer periphery welded portion 400b extends, and extending on a plane parallel to these virtual planes. It is. The connection forming portion 440 will be described in detail later. The atmosphere communication path forming part 430 is formed so as to be located only on the front side of the frame part 110 (on the first chamber 111a side of the ink storage chamber 111). The circumferential welded portion 412a, the virtual plane R, and the virtual plane S are partitioned by a plate portion 438 extending in parallel therewith. The atmosphere communication path forming part 430 will also be described in detail later. In this embodiment, the ink storage chamber 111 (internal space) in the frame portion 110 is an area including the supply path forming section 420, the atmosphere communication path forming section 430, the connection forming section 440, and the dispensing path forming section 450. However, since the atmosphere communication path forming unit 430 is an atmospheric path for introducing the atmosphere into the ink storage chamber 111, the area may be different from the ink storage chamber 111 (internal space) in the frame 110. This means that the space excluding the atmosphere communication path forming portion 430 from the ink storage chamber 111 (internal space) is substantially regarded as a space where ink is stored.

  Further, at the outer edge of the frame part 110, there are two places, one at the bottom (the lower part of FIG. 14 (a) and the lower part of FIG. 14 (b)) and the upper part (the upper part of FIG. 14 (a) and the upper part of FIG. 14 (b)). A thin plate-like convex portion is formed, and through-holes 460a to 460c into which the rod members 215a to 215c (see FIG. 8) of the first case member 210 described above are inserted are formed in the convex portion.

  First, with reference to Fig.14 (a), the inner periphery welding parts 411a-417a are demonstrated. The inner circumference welded portions 411a to 417a are provided in the inner circumference welded portion 411a provided in the supply path forming portion 420, the inner circumference welded portion 412a provided in the atmosphere communication path forming portion 430, and the connection forming portion 440. It is comprised by the inner periphery welding part 413a-417a. Moreover, the welding surface part of the inner periphery welding parts 411a-417a is located on the same virtual plane as the welding surface part of the outer periphery welding part 400a, and can weld the film 160 on the same plane (virtual plane R). .

  The inner circumference welded portion 411a is provided in the supply path forming portion 420, and is configured by a standing wall that is inclined downward in a direction intersecting the longitudinal direction B of the frame portion 110 (see FIG. 8, FIG. 14 (a) left-right direction). Yes. The inner circumference welded portion 412a forms one side wall (standing wall) of the atmospheric connection path 433, which will be described later, in the atmospheric communication passage forming portion 430, and extends in a direction intersecting the longitudinal direction B (X direction) of the frame portion 110. It is composed of standing walls that are inclined downward. The inner circumference welded portion 413 a is provided in the vicinity of the air introduction portion 130, and a standing wall inclined downward in a direction intersecting with the longitudinal direction B of the frame portion 110, and the longitudinal wall from the standing wall to the longitudinal direction B of the frame portion 110. It is comprised by the substantially T shape with the standing wall extended in the substantially orthogonal direction (FIG. 14 (a) up-down direction). The inner circumference welded portion 414a is formed in a substantially inverted U-shape, and a standing wall that is parallel to the longitudinal direction B of the frame portion 110 and a substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction B of the frame portion 110 from the standing wall. The vertical wall extends in the direction, and the vertical wall is inclined downward from the vertical wall in a direction intersecting the longitudinal direction B of the frame portion 110. The inner circumference welded portion 415a includes a standing wall that is parallel to the longitudinal direction B of the frame portion 110, a standing wall that is curved substantially perpendicularly from the standing wall toward the lower portion of the frame portion 110, and the frame portion 110 from the standing wall. And a standing wall that descends in a direction intersecting with the longitudinal direction B (Y direction). The inner circumference welded portion 416 a is provided in the vicinity of the ink dispensing portion 150 and is constituted by a standing wall that is inclined downward in a direction intersecting the longitudinal direction B of the frame portion 110. The inner circumference welded portion 417 a is provided in the vicinity of the ink dispensing portion 150, and a standing wall extending in a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction B of the frame portion 110, and from the standing wall in the longitudinal direction B of the frame portion 110. It is comprised with the standing wall inclined down in the direction which cross | intersects.

  That is, the inner circumferential welded portions 411a to 417a have at least some of the standing walls inclined downward or substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction B of the frame portion 110 (that is, in the position where the ink cartridge 14 is mounted). It extends to the bottom of the chamber 111, and the end on the bottom side (lower side in FIG. 14A) is a free end. Therefore, even if a plurality of inner circumference welded portions 411a to 417a are provided inside the outer circumference welded portion 400a in order to suppress the slackness of the film 160 when the film 160 is welded to the frame portion 110, the plurality of inner circumferences thereof The welded portions 411a to 417a prevent the flow of ink toward the ink supply unit 120 as much as possible. Further, since the inner circumference welded portions 411a to 417a are arranged to be diffused (distributed in plural) inside the outer circumference welded portion 400a, the occurrence of slack in the film 160 is efficiently prevented, and the ink It does not block the flow.

  As shown in FIG. 14B, the inner circumference welded portions 411b to 417b are the same as the inner circumference welded portions 411b and 413b to 417b, and the inner circumference welded portions 411a and the inner circumference welded portions 413a to 417a described above. It has substantially the same shape and is formed at a position corresponding to the inner circumference welded portion 411a and the inner circumference welded portions 413a to 417a, and only the inner circumference welded portion 412b is formed at a different position from the inner circumference welded portion 412a. Yes. Moreover, the welding surface part of the inner periphery welding parts 411b-417b is located on the same virtual plane as the welding surface part of the outer periphery welding part 400b, and can weld the film 160 on the same plane (virtual plane S). .

  The inner circumference welded portion 412b is similar to the inner circumference welded portion 412b1 formed of a standing wall extending from the outer circumference welded portion 400b in a direction (Y direction) substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction B of the frame portion 110, similarly to the outer circumference welded portion. It is comprised by the inner periphery welding part 412b2 comprised by the standing wall extended in the direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction B from the part 400b. The inner circumference welded part 412b1 and the inner circumference welded part 412b2 are erected from a plate part 438 that defines the atmosphere communication path forming part 430. This is because the atmosphere communication path forming part 430 is formed only on the front side of the frame part 110, and the occurrence of slack in the film 160 corresponding to the back side of the atmosphere communication path forming part 430 is suppressed. Therefore, inner circumference welded parts 412b1 and 412b2 are provided. In addition, since the inner circumference welded portions 411b to 417b are provided as free ends and diffused (distributed in plural) on the back side of the frame portion 110 as well as the front side, the film 160 is loosened. Inhibition of ink flow can be efficiently reduced.

  Further, by providing the inner circumference welded portions 411a to 417a and 411b to 417b by diffusing (dispersing them), for example, when the case 200 is formed from a soft resin material, the case is Even if the ink storage body 100 is deformed, the deformation of the case can be restricted by the inner circumference welded portions 411a to 417a and 411b to 417b. Therefore, damage to the case and damage to the film 160 can be prevented. Furthermore, since the outer periphery welded portions 400a and 400b and the inner periphery welded portions 411a to 417a and 411b to 417b are formed by standing walls erected on the front side or the back side, when the frame portion 110 is injection molded, Does not require extremely complicated molds. Therefore, the manufacturing cost of the ink cartridge 14 can be reduced.

  Next, the supply path forming unit 420 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a view showing the supply path forming section 420, and FIG. 15A is a view showing the outline of the supply path forming section 420 (a view on the back side of the frame section 110). FIG. 15B is a cross-sectional view of the supply path forming unit 420 along the line XVb-XVb in FIG. 15A, and FIG. 15C is a view showing a state where the remaining amount of ink is reduced. FIG. 4D is a diagram illustrating a state in which the ink supply is completed.

  As shown in FIG. 15A, the supply path forming section 420 includes a first supply communication hole 421 communicating with the ink supply section 120 and a first supply communication hole 421 so as to surround the first supply communication hole 421. A supply partition 422 formed in a substantially triangular frame shape when viewed in the vertical direction, and a plate portion 427 that occupies a region inside the supply partition 422 and extends in parallel between the virtual plane R and the virtual plane S, A second supply communication hole 423 formed by cutting a part of the supply partition wall 422, a part of the bottom of the ink storage chamber 111 (the lower part of FIG. 15A, the bottom of the ink storage chamber 111 in the outer periphery welded part 400b, and Between the virtual plane R and the virtual plane S extending from the outer periphery welded section 400b and the supply partition wall 422, and a supply recess 424 formed in a concave shape (stepped shape). these A plate portion 428 extending in parallel, an arm holding portion 425 provided at a free end of the plate portion 428 and attached with a sensor arm 470 (“displacement member”, see FIG. 19) as a rotating member described later, and the arm holding portion It mainly includes an inner circumference welded portion 411a provided in the direction from the portion 425 to the detecting portion 140 (see FIG. 14B). The supply partition 422 is to which the film 160 is welded, and the welding surface portion thereof is located on the same virtual plane (virtual plane S) as the welding surface portion of the outer peripheral welding portion 400b. The space surrounded by the supply partition wall 422 and the plate portion 427 is an ink supply chamber 426 that temporarily stores ink to be supplied to the ink supply portion 120. The space formed by the supply recess portion 424 and the plate portion 428 is a recess portion. This is a space 424a. As shown in FIG. 14B, the recessed space 424 a is lower than the portion 400 b 1 that becomes the bottom of the ink storage chamber 111 (internal space) in the height direction (Y direction) of the cartridge 14, and It is a space portion located on the bottom side (the lowest side) of them. Further, as shown in FIG. 15A, the first supply communication hole 421 is formed above the bottom portion 400b1 (the same height as the upper end of the recessed space 424a), and the second supply communication hole 423 is formed. It is formed below the bottom portion 400b1. That is, the second supply communication hole 423 is located on the lower side (bottom side) of the ink storage chamber 111 than the first supply communication hole 421. Further, the arm holding portion 425 is formed in a substantially reverse C shape when viewed in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 15A, and a part of the side opposite to the ink supply portion 120 (left side in FIG. 15A) is opened. Yes. 14A and 14B, the above-described welded portion 411b and welded portion 411a are erected from the plate portion 428 toward the opposite sides.

  As shown in FIG. 15B, the supply partition 422 is formed so as to separate the inside of the frame portion 110 (ink storage chamber 111) and the first supply communication hole 421 when the film 160 is welded. . That is, the ink supply chamber 426 surrounded by the supply partition 422 communicates with the inside of the frame part 110 only through the second supply communication hole 423. Therefore, the ink stored in the frame part 110 is supplied from the second supply communication path 423 into the ink supply chamber 426, and then supplied from the first supply communication hole 421 to the ink supply part 120 (FIG. 15 ( c) A path (ink channel) indicated by an arrow D).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 15C and FIG. 15D, the ink flow path D that supplies ink inside the frame unit 110 to the ink supply unit 120 will be described. As shown in FIG. 15C, when the liquid level I of the ink stored in the frame part 110 is above the supply recess 424, the ink passes through the ink flow path indicated by the arrow D in FIG. Ink is supplied to the ink supply unit 120. In this case, since the recessed space 424a is filled with ink, the ink supply chamber 426 surrounded by the supply partition 422 is also filled with ink. That is, in the state of FIG. 15C, since the ink supply chamber 426 is filled with ink, even if the ink level I drops below the first supply communication hole 421, the ink supply chamber 426 passes through the second supply communication hole 423. Thus, ink can be supplied to the ink supply unit 120. In this embodiment, the ink supply unit 120 has a substantially cylindrical shape as shown in FIG. 8, and a part of the ink supply mechanism 500 and a check valve 670 are accommodated in the ink supply body 116 as described later. Further, since the shaft portion 672 (see FIG. 29) of the check valve 670 is inserted through the first supply communication hole 421, considering the space occupied by the ink supply mechanism 500 and the check valve 670, the first supply communication hole 421 is formed. There is a limit to forming it on the bottom side of the ink storage chamber 111 (brame portion 110). In the configuration in which the supply partition 422 is not provided, when the ink level I drops from the first supply communication hole 421, the ink cannot be supplied, and the ink in the ink storage chamber 111 is used up. However, by providing the supply partition 422 and forming the second supply communication hole 433 on the bottom side of the first supply communication hole 431, the ink can be supplied until the ink level I drops below the second supply communication hole 433. The ink can be used up.

  When ink is further supplied from the state of FIG. 15C and the liquid level I of the ink is lower than the upper end portion of the supply recess 424 and lower than the second supply communication hole 423, the second supply communication hole 423 is used. The atmosphere flows into the ink supply chamber 426 surrounded by the supply partition 422, and as a result, the ink cannot be supplied any more (state shown in FIG. 15D).

  As shown in FIG. 15D, a difference of a distance t1 is provided between a portion 400b1 which is the bottom of the ink storage chamber 111 in the outer periphery welded portion 400b and the lower end of the second supply communication hole 423. Here, if the second supply communication hole 423 is above the portion 400b1 which is the bottom of the ink storage chamber 111, when the ink level I reaches the second supply communication hole 423, ink cannot be supplied any more. As a result, the ink runs out. Therefore, the supply recess 424 is provided, and the second supply communication hole 423 is configured to be positioned lower than the portion 400b1 serving as the bottom of the ink storage chamber 111 by a distance t1. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 15D, in the state where the ink supply is completed, only a small amount of ink remains in the vicinity of the bottom of the supply recess 424 (a portion below the second supply communication hole 423) and cannot be supplied. The amount of ink can be significantly reduced. Further, since the supply recess 424 is formed at the bottom of the ink storage chamber 111 (see FIG. 14), the ink in the ink storage chamber 111 flows into the supply recess 424 when the ink is low, and the supply recess 424 To gather. Therefore, by providing the supply recess 424, the ink in the ink storage chamber 111 can be used up.

  Further, residue E remains in the ink remaining in the supply recess 424. This is because a difference of the distance t2 is provided between the second supply communication hole 423 and the bottom side wall (the side wall on the lower side of FIG. 15D) of the supply recess 424. As described above, when the ink level I drops from the second supply communication hole 423, ink cannot be supplied any more, so that the ink between the second supply communication hole 423 and the bottom side wall of the supply recess 424 can be prevented. Is not supplied to the ink supply unit 120 and remains in the supply recess 424. There may be dust or plastic residue remaining in the frame 110 when the ink cartridge 14 is manufactured in the ink, but the dust or plastic residue has a specific gravity greater than the specific gravity of the ink. It remains near the bottom in the frame 110. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 15D, the residue E remains in the ink remaining in the supply recess 424. When the waste E is supplied to the ink supply unit 120 and supplied to the multi-function device 1 (see FIG. 1), ink clogging may occur, and accurate printing cannot be performed. However, as described above, by providing the distance t2 between the second supply communication hole 423 and the bottom side wall of the supply recess 424, the residue E remains in the supply recess 424, thereby reducing the occurrence of ink clogging. can do.

  Next, the atmosphere communication path forming unit 430 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a view showing the atmosphere communication path forming portion 430, FIG. 16 (a) is a perspective view showing the outline of the atmosphere communication path forming portion 430, and FIG. It is the figure which showed the atmosphere communication path formation part 430 in the arrow XVIb view of a), and FIG.16 (c) is the figure which showed the atmosphere communication path formation part 430 in the arrow XVIc view of FIG.16 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 16A, the atmosphere communication path forming portion 430 is formed in a first atmosphere communication chamber 431 formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped communicating with the atmosphere introduction portion 130 and a substantially rectangular parallelepiped communicating with the ink storage chamber 111. The first atmosphere communication chamber 432, the first atmosphere communication chamber 431, and the second atmosphere communication chamber 432 are welded to the first surface 437a side (the left front side in FIG. 16, the first surface 437a is a virtual plane R). And an atmospheric air connection path 433 that communicates with each other. The first atmosphere communication chamber 431, the second atmosphere communication chamber 432, and the atmosphere connection path 433 form a chamber and a passage, respectively, by welding the film 160 to the front side of FIG.

  On the second surface 437 b side (the second surface 437 b is the surface of the plate portion 438 described above) facing the first surface 437 a side of the first atmosphere communication chamber 431, the first atmosphere communicated with the atmosphere introduction unit 130. A communication hole 434 is formed. The second atmosphere communication chamber 432 has a second atmosphere communication hole 435 that communicates with the first chamber 111 a of the ink storage chamber 111 on the first surface 437 a side, and communicates with the second chamber 111 b of the ink storage chamber 111. A third atmospheric communication hole 436 is formed in the second surface 437b (plate portion 438). The first atmosphere communication hole 434 is formed in the side wall surface 431a of the first atmosphere communication chamber 431 on the atmosphere introduction part 130 side (the port side in FIG. 16), and the communication port 433b is formed in the second atmosphere communication chamber 432. 1 is formed on the side wall surface 432a on the atmosphere communication chamber 431 side (the port side on FIG. 16). As described above, one of the side walls of the atmosphere connection path 433 (the lower side wall in FIG. 16A) is the inner circumference welded portion 412a.

  In the atmosphere connection path 433, communication ports 433a and 433b communicating with the first atmosphere communication chamber 431 and the second atmosphere communication chamber 432 are formed on the first surface 437a side, and the communication ports 433a and 433b are formed. The opening areas are extremely smaller than the side wall areas of the first atmosphere communication chamber 431 and the second atmosphere communication chamber 432 (the side wall surfaces 431a and 432a where the communication ports 433a and 433b are formed). By providing a portion (atmospheric connection path 433) having an extremely small cross-sectional area of the passage for introducing the atmosphere (so-called labyrinth), the resistance to circulation when the atmosphere passes is increased. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the evaporation of unnecessary ink through the atmosphere connection path 433.

  As is clear from FIG. 14A, the atmosphere connection path 433 is inclined downward from the first atmosphere communication chamber 431 toward the second atmosphere communication chamber 432. When the atmosphere connection path 433 is inclined downward, the ink that has entered the atmosphere connection path 433 is naturally caused by gravity when the ink cartridge 14 is in a posture to be mounted on the refill unit 13 of the multi-function device 1. The ink can be returned to the ink storage chamber 111. Further, by reducing the cross-sectional area of the atmosphere connection path 433, it is possible to reduce the ink stored in the ink storage chamber 111 from entering the atmosphere connection path 433. Here, when ink enters the atmosphere connection path 433, a meniscus may be formed and the atmosphere may not be normally introduced. As described above, since the atmosphere connection path 433 is inclined downward, even if ink enters, the ink is returned to the ink storage chamber 111, so that formation of a meniscus can be prevented as much as possible. Furthermore, since the atmosphere connection path 433 is formed by welding the film 160, at least one surface is a side wall that can be bent and deformed. That is, the air connection path 433 is configured such that its cross-sectional area is easily changed. Therefore, even if a meniscus is formed, the meniscus is easily broken by the film 160 being bent and deformed, so that the atmosphere can be normally introduced. Since a part of the surface of the second air communication hole 435 is also formed by the film 160, it is possible to prevent the meniscus from being formed in the second air communication hole 435 as much as possible.

  Further, the third atmosphere communication hole 436 is formed at the uppermost part of the second atmosphere communication chamber 432 when the ink cartridge 14 is mounted in the multi-function device 1 (see FIG. 1) (the state shown in FIG. 16A). Has been. Therefore, even if a meniscus is formed in the second atmosphere communication hole 435 or ink is stored so as to close the second atmosphere communication hole 435, the atmosphere is stored in the ink through the third atmosphere communication hole 436. It can be reliably introduced into the chamber 111.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 16B and 16C, a mechanism for preventing ink leakage from the atmosphere communication path forming portion 430 will be described. As described above, the case 200 of the ink cartridge 14 is formed in a cubic shape including a pair of maximum surfaces facing each other. Therefore, when the case 200 is placed on a flat floor, the case 200 has a pair of maximum surfaces 210a and 220a. Two mounting postures can be taken in which either one is the lower surface (bottom surface). At this time, the air introduction part 130 is located on the side surface of the case 200, but the ink is unlikely to leak from the air communication path forming part 430 in any posture as described below.

  16 (b) and 16 (c) show the attitudes of the atmosphere communication path forming unit 430 corresponding to the two mounting attitudes, respectively, and FIG. 16 (b) shows the atmosphere connection path 433. Is the lower side (the first chamber 111a side of the frame portion 110 is on the lower side and the first surface 437a is on the lower side), and FIG. Is the case where the ink cartridge 14 is placed so that is positioned on the upper side (the second chamber 111b side of the frame part 110 is the lower side and the second surface 437b is the lower side).

  As shown in FIG. 16B, when the ink cartridge 14 is placed such that the air connection path 433 is positioned on the lower side during the transportation of the ink cartridge 14, the ink stored in the ink storage chamber 111 is changed to the first. The air enters the first atmosphere communication chamber 431 through the two atmosphere communication chamber 432 and the atmosphere communication chamber 433. As described above, since the atmosphere connection path 433 communicates with the communication port 433b that is extremely smaller than the area of the side surface of the second atmosphere communication chamber 432, the ink in the ink storage chamber 111 passes through the atmosphere communication chamber 433. In some cases, the first atmosphere communication chamber 431 may not necessarily enter the street. In the state of FIG. 16B, since the ink level I has not reached the opening position of the first atmosphere communication hole 434, even if the ink cartridge 14 is placed so that the atmosphere connection path 433 is positioned on the lower side. Ink can be prevented from flowing out from the air introduction part 130 to the outside.

  As shown in FIG. 16C, when the ink cartridge 14 is placed so that the atmosphere connection path 433 is positioned on the upper side during the transport of the ink cartridge 14, the ink stored in the ink storage chamber 111 is 2 Although flowing into the atmosphere communication chamber 432, the ink level I does not reach the opening position of the communication port 433 b of the atmosphere connection path 433. As a result, ink does not flow into the atmosphere connection path 433 from the communication port 433b, so that ink does not flow into the first atmosphere communication chamber 431. Therefore, even if the ink cartridge 14 is placed so that the atmosphere connection path 433 is positioned on the upper side, the ink can be prevented from flowing out from the atmosphere introduction unit 130.

  As described above, the first atmosphere communication chamber 431, the second atmosphere communication chamber 432, and the atmosphere connection path 433 are configured as described above, and the opening position of the first atmosphere communication hole 434 and the opening position of the communication port 433b are defined as the atmosphere connection path. By providing it at a position that is symmetric with respect to 433, it is possible to prevent ink from leaking out from the atmosphere introduction unit 130. Furthermore, by reducing the cross-sectional area of the atmosphere connection path 433, ink evaporation can be reduced and ink can be prevented from flowing into the first atmosphere communication chamber 431.

  Here, returning to FIG. 14, the connection forming portion 440 will be described. The connection forming part 440 connects the vicinity of the air introduction part 130 and the vicinity of the ink dispensing part 150 in the ink storage chamber 111, and is formed at a substantially central position in the ink storage chamber 111. Therefore, since the connection formation part 440 connects two places where the frame part 110 opposes, it is also a reinforcement member which maintains the intensity | strength of the frame part 110. FIG. In addition, the connection forming portion 440 separates the partition plate (the first chamber 111a and the second chamber 111b of the ink storage chamber 111 from each other) so that the first opening 112a side and the second opening 112b side are substantially equivalent space regions. It is also a partition plate that partitions in a communicated state.

  The connection forming part 440 is connected to the atmosphere side connection part 441 provided on the atmosphere introduction part 130 side (the left side in FIG. 14 (a) or the right side in FIG. 14 (b)) with the inner circumference welded parts 415a and 415b as a boundary. It is comprised with the dispensing connection part 442 provided in the injection part 150 side (FIG. 14 (a) right side or FIG.14 (b) left side). The atmosphere side connecting portion 441 includes inner circumference welded portions 413a, 413b, 414a, and 414b from the atmosphere side connecting portion 441, respectively, on the first and second openings 112a and 112b sides (FIG. 14 (a) in front of the paper surface in the vertical direction). 14B or FIG. 14B, the front side and the heel side in the vertical direction of the paper surface, where the vertical direction of the paper surface is parallel to the Z direction). Furthermore, the upper end in the height direction (Y direction) of the atmosphere side connection portion 441 is connected to the inner circumference welded portion 412a of the atmosphere communication path forming portion 430. In addition, the dispensing-side connecting portion 442 includes inner peripheral welded portions 416a, 416b, 417a, and 417b from the dispensing-side connecting portion 442 on the first and second openings 112a and 112b sides (FIG. 14A). It is erected on the front side and the heel side in the vertical direction or on the front side and the heel side in the vertical direction of FIG. 14B, where the vertical direction on the paper surface is parallel to the Z direction.

  The atmosphere-side connecting portion 441 is formed with a first connecting communication hole 443 that communicates between the first chamber 111a and the second chamber 111b, and the dispensing-side connecting portion 442 has the first chamber 111a. The second to fourth connection communication holes 444 to 446 are formed to connect the first chamber 111b and the second chamber 111b. Here, if the connection communication holes 443 to 446 are not formed in the connection forming portion 440, the first chamber 111a and the second chamber 111b do not communicate with each other at the substantially central portion of the ink storage chamber 111. There may be a slight difference in the amount of ink from the second chamber 111b. If there is a difference in the amount of ink between the first chamber 111a and the second chamber 111b, a difference occurs in the air pressure in the ink storage chamber 111, which causes a problem that ink cannot be supplied smoothly (or accurately). However, by forming the connection communication holes 443 to 446 by diffusing into the connection formation portion 440, the ink amount in the first chamber 111a and the second chamber 111b can be made substantially equal, and the ink can be smoothly (or Accurately) can be supplied.

  A portion surrounded by the atmosphere side connecting portion 441, the dispensing side connecting portion 442, and the atmosphere communication path forming portion 430 is a first storage chamber opening 113 that communicates the first chamber 111a and the second chamber 111b. A portion surrounded by the atmosphere side connecting portion 441, the dispensing side connecting portion 442, and the supply path forming portion 420 is a second storage chamber opening 114 that communicates the first chamber 111a and the second chamber 111b. That is, the portion for introducing the atmosphere into the ink storage chamber 111 and the portion for supplying the ink stored in the ink storage chamber 111 to the outside do not have the connection forming portion 440, and the first chamber 111 a and the first chamber The two chambers 111b communicate with each other without being partitioned. Therefore, introduction of air and ink supply can be performed in a stable space.

  Further, the connection forming portion 440 includes a connection rib 418a that connects a plurality of inner circumference welded portions 412a to 417a standing from the connection forming portion 440 to the first opening 112a side, and a connection forming portion 440 from the second opening 112b side. Connection ribs 418b are formed to connect the inner circumferential welded portions 412b to 417b that stand upright. Although not shown, the connecting ribs 418a and 418b are formed in a thin wall shape with standing walls lower than the inner circumference welded portions 412a to 417a and the inner circumference welded portions 412b to 417b. Further, most of the connecting ribs 418 a and 418 b are formed at the edge of the connection forming portion 440. Therefore, since the connection ribs 418a and 418b connect the inner circumference welded portions 412a to 417a and 412b to 417b and are formed at the edge of the connection forming portion 440, the strength of the connection forming portion 440 can be maintained. Further, since the connecting ribs 418a and 418b are formed in a thin shape and are formed with standing walls lower than the inner circumference welded portions 412a to 417a and 412b to 417b, it is difficult to prevent the ink flow.

  Next, the dispensing path forming unit 450 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing the dispensing channel forming unit 450, FIG. 17A is a diagram showing an outline of the dispensing channel forming unit 450, and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the dispensing path formation part 450 in the XVIIb-XVIIb line | wire of (). The dispensing path forming unit 450 is positioned at the top of the ink storage chamber 111 in a posture in which ink is dispensed, and the dispensed ink is directed toward the ink supply unit 120 and the air introduction unit 130. To flow down.

  As shown in the drawing, the dispensing channel forming part 450 includes a dispensing cylinder part 451 formed in a substantially cylindrical shape into which an ink dispensing plug 520 (see FIG. 21) described later is press-fitted, and the dispensing cylinder part 451. The first dispensing communication hole 452 that communicates with the inside of the ink storage chamber 111, the standing tip from the outer surface of the dispensing cylinder 451, and the welding tip to which the film 160 is welded become the first surface. A substantially U-shaped dispensing partition wall 453 that partitions the dispensing communication hole 452 with respect to the ink storage chamber 111 and a second dispensing communication hole 454 that is an opening of the dispensing partition wall 453 are mainly provided. . Further, the opened portion of the dispensing tube portion 451 is an opening 451a formed on the outer end surface of the frame portion 110, and the surface facing the opening 451a is the bottom portion 451b of the dispensing tube portion 451. The range defined by the dispensing partition 453 and the film 160 is the dispensing partition channel 453a.

  In addition, the dispensing partition 453 serves as an inner circumference welded portion where the film 160 is welded, and the dispensing partition channel 453a and the second dispensing communication hole 454 are formed in a state where the film 160 is welded. . Moreover, the welding end part of the dispensing partition wall 453 is located on the same virtual plane as the welding end part of the outer periphery welding part 400b similarly to the welding end part of the other inner periphery welding parts 411b-417b.

  As will be described later, when ink is dispensed into the ink storage chamber 111, the second dispensing communication hole 454 is positioned above and the first dispensing communication hole 452 is positioned below. Dispensing is performed (attitude in which the Y direction is the horizontal direction in FIG. 17A). Further, the ink passes in the order of the dispensing cylinder portion 451 of the dispensing forming portion 450, the first dispensing communication hole 452, the dispensing partition channel 453a surrounded by the dispensing partition 453, and the second dispensing communication hole 454. The ink is dispensed until the ink level I reaches FIG. In addition, the dispensing partition wall 453 is formed substantially linearly from the first dispensing communication hole 452 to the second dispensing communication hole 454. Therefore, the ink is dispensed smoothly without resistance.

  If ink is dispensed to fill the ink storage chamber 111, the volume of the ink expands and the film 160 is damaged or deformed depending on the environment in which the ink cartridge 14 is placed. If the film 160 is damaged, the ink leaks, and if the film 160 is deformed, the volume in the ink storage chamber 111 changes and stable ink supply cannot be performed. Therefore, in order to prevent the damage and deformation of the film 160, the ink is not dispensed until the ink storage chamber 111 is full.

  In this embodiment, the air pressure in the ink storage chamber 111 after the ink is dispensed is made lower than the atmospheric pressure. Therefore, a decompression process may be performed after the atmosphere in the ink storage chamber 111 is sucked from the dispensing path forming unit 450 and decompressed. This is performed to reduce the atmosphere in the ink storage chamber 111 in order to maintain the degree of deaeration of the ink, and to reduce the generation of bubbles in the ink. The degassing of the ink is for keeping the viscosity of the ink substantially constant, and the generation of bubbles in the ink is for discharging the ink when the bubbles are supplied to the multi-function device 1 (see FIG. 1). This is because the pressure is not transmitted to the ejection port (not shown) and the ink cannot be ejected accurately.

  In addition, when the post-depressurization step is performed, if the atmosphere in the ink storage chamber 111 is sucked from the dispensing path forming unit 450, an accurate ink amount is not obtained even though an appropriate amount of ink is dispensed. If the amount of ink decreases, it will cause a loss to the user of the ink cartridge 14, which is not preferable. Therefore, the first dispensing communication hole 452 is surrounded by a substantially U-shaped dispensing partition wall 453, and the second dispensing communication hole 454 is located above the ink level I (or the first dispensing communication hole 452) (FIG. 17 ( Even if the inside of the ink storage chamber 111 is depressurized, the ink in the ink storage chamber 111 is separated because there is a distance between the ink liquid level I and the second dispensing communication hole 454. It is possible to prevent as much as possible from being pulled out through the injection path forming portion 450.

  Here, the structure in the vicinity of the detection unit 140 will be described with reference to FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the vicinity of the detection unit 140, FIG. 18 (a) is a diagram showing an outline of the vicinity of the detection unit 140, and FIG. 18 (b) is an XVIIIb− of FIG. 18 (a). FIG. 18C is a cross-sectional view of the detection unit 140 taken along line XVIIIb, and FIG. 18C is a cross-sectional view of the vicinity of the detection unit 140 taken along line XVIIIc-XVIIIc of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, the detection unit 140 protrudes outward (right side in FIG. 18A) from the frame unit 110. The detection unit 140 includes an inner packet part 141 that encloses the tip (shielding arm part 473c) of the sensor arm 470 (see FIG. 19) between a pair of wall surfaces and forms a passage through which the sensor arm 470 can be displaced. The inner packet part 141 includes a bottom surface formed by a bottom wall 141a in the lower part (lower side in FIG. 18A) in the inner packet part 141, and a pair of side walls 141b erected on both sides from the bottom wall 141a. A side surface, a heel side surface formed by a heel side wall 141c standing from the bottom wall 141a and continuous with the both side walls 141b, and a bottom connected to the upper edge of both side walls 141b and the heel side wall 141c A substantially box-shaped passage is formed by a ceiling surface formed by a ceiling wall 141d arranged to face the wall 141a. The detection unit 140 is further provided so as to protrude upward from the bottom surface formed by the bottom wall 141a, and includes an arm support unit 142 that supports the sensor arm 470 from below, and in the vicinity of the detection unit 140, An upright wall 143 is provided which is connected to the arm support portion 142 and extends in the direction of the supply path forming portion 420 and is erected from the inner wall (outer peripheral weld portion 400b) of the frame portion 110. As is clear from FIG. 18B, the arm support portion 142 is formed at the center in the width direction (Z direction) of the passage in the detection portion 140, and the tip of the sensor arm 470 (the shielding arm portion 473c) is also formed. It is arranged so as to be located at the center of the passage in the detection unit 140. Although details will be described later, the sensor arm 470 rotates according to the amount of ink in the ink storage chamber 111, and the ink remaining amount detection sensor 57 provided in the multi-function device 1 (see FIG. 5). By detecting the position of the shielding arm portion 473c by means of this, it is confirmed that the ink cartridge 14 is mounted in the storage chamber 50 (see FIG. 4) of the refill unit 13 of the multi-function device 1 and that the remaining amount of ink has decreased. It is a member used for detection. FIG. 18B shows the positions of the light emitting portion 57 a and the light receiving portion 57 b of the ink remaining amount detection sensor 57 when the ink cartridge 14 is stored in the storage chamber 50 of the multi-function device 1. As shown in the drawing, the light emitting unit 57 a and the light receiving unit 57 b are located close to the detecting unit 140.

  As shown in FIG. 18B, from the first gap t3 between the inner wall of the inner packet part 141 (the pair of wall surfaces, the inner surfaces of both side walls 141b) and the outer wall of the sensor arm 470, the inner wall of the inner packet part 141 (the pair of walls) The thickness of the arm support portion 142 is formed so that the second gap t4 between the wall surface, the inner surface of the side walls 141b) and the outer wall of the arm support portion 142 becomes narrower. Here, when the ink stored in the detection unit 140 decreases, the ink level I decreases as the ink decreases, and when the ink level I decreases from the detection unit 140, the ink in the detection unit 140 decreases. Although the first gap t3 between the sensor arm 470 and the inner packet part 141 is very small, ink remains in the detection unit 140 due to the surface tension of the ink, and the sensor arm 470 is normal due to the surface tension of the ink. May not rotate. Incidentally, the reason why the first interval t3 is set to be a minute interval is that if the interval is increased, the interval between the light emitting portion 57a and the light receiving portion 57b is increased, and the detection sensitivity of the remaining ink amount detecting sensor 57 is deteriorated. Therefore, by forming the arm support portion 142 so that the first gap t3> the second gap t4, the arm support portion 142 and the inner packet portion 141 are obtained from the surface tension of the ink generated between the sensor arm 470 and the inner packet portion 141. The surface tension of the ink generated between the two is increased. As a result, the ink remaining in the inner packet part 141 is attracted between the arm support part 142 and the inner packet part 141, so that it is possible to avoid the ink from remaining between the sensor arm 470 and the inner packet part 141 as much as possible. The inhibition of the behavior of the arm 470 can be suppressed. Accordingly, since the sensor arm 470 behaves normally, the remaining amount of ink can be accurately detected.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 18A, the bottom wall 141a at the lower part (lower side in FIG. 18A) of the inner packet part 141 is inclined downward toward the ink storage chamber 111. The bottom surface formed by the bottom wall 141a is also inclined downward. Therefore, the ink drawn between the inner packet part 141 and the arm support part 142 flows down in the direction of the ink storage chamber 111 (or the supply path forming part 420). Further, as shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 18B, the connecting portion (edge) between the bottom wall 141a of the inner packet part 141 and the arm support part 142 is formed in a cross-sectional view (substantially right angle). The capillary force at the connecting portion between the inner packet part 141 and the arm support part 142 becomes stronger, and the ink is easily guided to the ink storage chamber 111 (or the supply path forming part 420). That is, the connecting portion between the inner packet part 141 and the arm support part 142 becomes a liquid guiding (guide) path for guiding ink. Therefore, the ink remaining in the inner packet part 141 can be efficiently flowed down.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, the standing wall 143 connected to the arm support portion 141 is formed on an inclined surface 143a that is inclined downward from the arm support portion 141 toward the supply path forming portion 420. The inclined surface 143a constitutes a part of the inner wall (outer periphery welded portion 400b) of the frame portion 110. Furthermore, as shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 18C, the connecting portion between the standing wall 143 and the inner wall of the frame portion 110 is formed in a cross-sectional angle (substantially right angle), and the thickness of the arm support portion 141 is substantially the same. It is formed equally. Therefore, the standing wall 143 is inclined downward in the direction of the supply path forming portion 420, and the connecting portion with the inner wall of the frame portion 110 is formed at a substantially right angle. Therefore, the supply path forming portion is efficiently used by the inclination and the capillary force. Ink can be directed in the 420 direction. That is, the connecting portion between the standing wall 143 and the inner wall of the frame portion 110 serves as a liquid guiding (guide) path for guiding ink. Since the arm support portion 142 and the standing wall 143 have substantially the same thickness, the standing wall 143 is formed continuously from the arm support portion 142. Therefore, there is no resistance in guiding the ink to the supply path forming unit 420, and the ink can be guided efficiently.

  When the sensor arm 470 is rotated upward, the sensor arm 470 comes into contact with the ceiling surface formed by the ceiling wall 141b facing the bottom wall 141a of the detection unit 140, and the rotation of the sensor arm 470 is restricted. Is done. Therefore, since the sensor arm 470 can be prevented from jumping out from the inner packet part 140, the behavior of the sensor arm 470 becomes accurate, and the remaining amount of ink can be detected accurately.

  Here, the sensor arm 470 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a view showing the sensor arm 470, FIG. 19A is a view showing the front side of the sensor arm 470, and FIG. 19B is a view taken along the arrow XIXb in FIG. It is the figure which showed the sensor arm 470 in. The sensor arm 470 is a member for detecting the remaining amount of ink in the ink storage chamber 111. The sensor arm 470 is made of a resin material (for example, polypropylene) and is manufactured by injection molding.

  The sensor arm 470 is a rotating member that rotates in accordance with the remaining amount of ink in the ink storage chamber 111, and a remaining ink detection sensor 57 that detects the remaining amount of ink stored in the ink storage chamber 111 (FIG. 5). A part is detected by reference). The sensor arm 470 includes a balance portion 471 made of a material having a specific gravity smaller than the specific gravity of the ink, a mounting portion 472 that is swingably attached to the frame portion 110, and the mounting portion 472 to the balance portion 471. It mainly includes an arm portion 473 that extends in the vertical direction (upward in FIG. 19A) and further inclines upward and blocks the detectable range of the ink remaining amount detection sensor 57. The attachment portion 472 serves as a connecting portion that connects the balance portion 471 and the arm portion 473.

  The attachment portion 472 is formed with a substantially cylindrical attachment shaft 472a attached to the arm holding portion 425 (see FIG. 14) of the frame portion 110. The attachment shaft 472a is formed to have a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the arm holding portion 425 and a diameter larger than the length of the opening of the arm holding portion 425. Therefore, when the sensor arm 470 rotates, the sensor arm 470 can be operated with less resistance and the sensor arm 470 can be prevented from being detached from the arm holding portion 425.

  The arm portion 473 includes a vertical arm portion 473a extending in a substantially vertical direction (upward in FIG. 19A) with respect to the balance portion 471, an inclined arm portion 473b inclined upward from the vertical arm portion 473a, and an ink remaining amount detection sensor. It is comprised with the shielding arm part 473c as a light-shielding part which shields the 57 detectable range.

  As shown in FIG. 19B, the arm portion 473 is formed extremely thin with respect to the balance portion 471 and the attachment portion 472. This is because when the arm portion 473 is formed thick, the detection portion 140 is enlarged, and as a result, the resistance force when the ink cartridge 14 becomes large or the sensor arm 470 rotates is increased. The remaining ink level may not be detected. Further, as described above, when the thickness of the detection unit 140 is increased, the detection range of the ink remaining amount detection sensor 57 is widened and the detection sensitivity is deteriorated. Therefore, an expensive and high-performance ink remaining amount with good detection characteristics. A detection sensor is required. Therefore, the arm portion 473 is formed thin in order to prevent the ink cartridge 14 from becoming large and to accurately detect the remaining amount of ink. The vertical arm portion 473a and the inclined arm portion 473b are formed with ribs 473d to maintain strength.

  Further, the shielding arm portion 473c has substantially hemispherical arm protrusions 473e1 and 473e2 at two places (upper end and lower end in FIG. 19A) of the portion accommodated in the detection unit 140. The arm protrusions 473e1 and 473e2 reduce the situation where the shield arm 473c is brought into close contact with the inner wall of the detection unit 140 due to the surface tension of the ink and cannot be rotated. That is, since the arm protrusions 473e1 and 373e2 are formed in a hemispherical shape, only the tip of the arm protrusions 473e1 and 473e2 is in contact with the inner wall of the detection unit 140, thereby reducing the influence of the surface tension of the ink. .

  Since the balance portion 471 is made of a resin material having a specific gravity smaller than the specific gravity of the ink, when the ink liquid level I decreases as the remaining ink amount decreases, the balance is reduced as the ink liquid level I decreases. The portion 471 moves in the direction toward the bottom of the frame portion 110 (the direction toward the bottom of the ink storage chamber 111, downward in FIGS. 14A and 14B). When the balance portion 471 moves in the bottom direction, the arm portion 473 moves upward using the mounting portion 472 as a support shaft of the rotation shaft, and the shielding arm portion 473c deviates from the detectable range of the ink remaining amount detection sensor 57. A state where ink has run out can be detected.

  In addition, in some conventional balance portions, the balance portion is hollowed in order to float the balance portion on the ink liquid surface I, but with this configuration, processing (or molding) of the balance portion becomes difficult. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the material of the sensor arm 470 is made of a material having a specific gravity smaller than the specific gravity of the ink, so that a processing step is not required and a complicated mold need not be manufactured. Therefore, the manufacturing cost of the sensor arm 470 can be reduced.

  Next, the positional relationship and shape of the ink supply unit 120, the air introduction unit 130, and the detection unit 140 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating a part of the ink reservoir 100, FIG. 20A is a diagram illustrating a side surface of the ink reservoir 100, and FIG. It is the figure which showed a part of front, FIG.20 (c) is sectional drawing in the XXc-XXc line | wire of Fig.20 (a).

  As shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b), an ink supply section is provided on one side surface (one end surface, the front surface in the mounting direction when the ink cartridge 14 is mounted) of the frame section 110. 120, an air introduction unit 130 and a detection unit 140 are provided. As described above, the posture shown in FIGS. 20A and 20B is a posture in which the ink cartridge 14 is mounted in the storage chamber 50 of the refill unit 13 (see FIG. 1). Therefore, in a state where the ink cartridge 14 is mounted in the refill unit 13, the air introduction unit 130, the detection unit 140, and the ink supply unit are arranged from the upper side (the upper side in FIG. 20A) to the lower side (the lower side in FIG. 20A). Arrange in order of 120. That is, the ink cartridges 14 are aligned in the height direction (Y direction).

  20A, the width t5 of the detection unit 140 is configured to be shorter than the diameter t6 of the opening of the ink supply unit 120 (the opening 600a of the supply cap 600 described later (see FIG. 34)). Yes. Further, as shown in FIG. 20B, the detection unit 140 is recessed in the direction of the frame unit 110 (at a position retracted toward the ink storage chamber 111) with respect to the ink supply unit 120 and the air introduction unit 130. Has been.

  As described above, the arm portion 473 of the sensor arm 470 is located inside the detection unit 140. Further, as will be described later, the remaining amount of ink can be detected by opening the optical path of the ink remaining amount detection sensor 57 (see FIG. 5) from the light-shielding state by rotating the arm portion 473. The ink remaining amount detection sensor 57 has both the light receiving portion 57b and the light emitting portion 57a on both sides of the detection portion 140 (left and right sides in FIG. 20A). The surfaces on both sides, the front surface and the heel surface in FIG. 20B, are the detection surfaces 140a and 140b. As is clear from FIG. 20A, these detection surfaces 140a and 140b are in the height direction (Y direction) of the ink cartridge 14 when the ink cartridge 14 is in the posture mounted on the refill unit 13. Parallel, that is, vertical. And when ink adheres to the surface of these detection surfaces 140a and 140b, there is a case where an accurate remaining amount of ink cannot be detected.

  For example, when the multifunction device 1 is transported, the multifunction device 1 is not necessarily transported so as to be horizontal. Therefore, the ink supply unit 120 may be located at the top, but at this time, ink may leak from the ink supply unit 120 and adhere to the detection unit 140. In addition, when the ink cartridge 144 is once removed from the refill unit 13, the ink attached to the needle 49 of the multi-function device 1 tends to adhere to the vicinity of the opening of the ink supply unit 120. Depending on the attitude when handling the cartridge 14, the ink attached near the opening of the ink supply unit 120 may adhere to the detection unit 140. Then, when the ink cartridge 14 is mounted on the refill unit 13 again with the ink attached to the detection unit 140, as described above, the ink detection unit 140 (the detection surfaces 140a and 140b thereof) and the remaining ink amount in the mounted state. Since the light receiving part 57b of the detection sensor 57 and the light emitting part 57a are close to each other, there is a possibility that the ink adhering to the detection part 140 may transfer to the light receiving part 57b and the light emitting part 57a of the ink remaining amount detection sensor 57. In this way, the ink adhering to the ink remaining amount detection sensor 57 blocks the light, so that the sensitivity of the ink remaining amount detection sensor 57 is deteriorated. This deterioration in sensitivity becomes more remarkable in a black cartridge using pigment ink.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20B, the position of the detection unit 140 is provided at a position retracted toward the ink storage chamber 111 with respect to the ink supply unit 120. Even if ink drips down, it can be made difficult to adhere to the detection unit 140. In other words, the ink adhering to the vicinity of the opening of the ink supply unit 120 has the ink cartridge 14 positioned above the detection unit 140 by the user and the end surface of the ink supply unit 120 (the opening 600a of the supply cap 600 is When it is held in a posture in which the formed end face) is vertical, it is most likely to fall under the influence of gravity, but the detection unit 140 is retracted toward the ink storage chamber 111 with respect to the ink supply unit 120. Therefore, the falling ink does not go to the detection unit 140 and therefore does not adhere to the detection unit 140.

  In addition, the detection surfaces 140a and 140b are vertical when the ink cartridge 14 is in the posture attached to the refill unit 13, so the ink cartridge 14 is attached to the refill unit 13 while the ink is attached to the detection surfaces 140a and 140b. When ink is most susceptible to gravity, it drops quickly. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the transfer of the ink to the light receiving portion 57b and the light emitting portion 57a of the ink remaining amount detection sensor 57 as much as possible. In addition, the dropped ink does not adhere to the end surface of the ink supply unit 120.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20C, the detection unit 140 is provided with side walls that form detection surfaces 140 a and 140 b from the side surfaces of the frame unit 110. Therefore, the edge portion 140c where the side surface of the frame portion 110 and the detection surfaces 140a and 140b intersect is formed at a substantially right angle. When ink adheres in the vicinity of the edge portion 140c, the edge portion 140c is formed at a substantially right angle. Therefore, the capillary force of the edge portion 140c acts, and the ink is transmitted through the edge portion 140c to the ink supply portion 120 side. It becomes easy to flow. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the adhesion of ink to the detection surfaces 140a and 140b.

  Next, the component configuration of the ink reservoir 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is an exploded front view of the ink reservoir 100.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the ink reservoir 100 is mainly broken down into four elements. The four parts are a frame part 110, an ink supply mechanism 500 constituting the ink supply part 120, an air introduction mechanism 510 constituting the air introduction part 130, and a dispensing cylinder part 451 of the ink dispensing part 150 (FIG. 17). Reference) and an ink dispensing plug 520 that is press-fitted into the inside. The ink dispensing plug 520 is made of an elastic member such as pulch rubber. Once the ink dispensing plug 520 is press-fitted into the dispensing cylinder 451, it cannot be easily removed, and a needle entry path is provided even if the needle is inserted or removed. It is configured to be blocked.

  Further, the frame part 110 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape in which a part of the ink supply mechanism 500 is inserted into a substantially cylindrical shape, and a part of the air introduction mechanism 510 is inserted. The air introduction body 117 is integrally formed. Further, the ink supply body 116 has protrusions 116 a and 116 b (protrusion parts 116 b not shown) protruding in the outer peripheral direction of the ink supply body 116 in order to fix the ink supply mechanism 500. They are symmetrically arranged around the center (arranged on the front side and the heel side in the vertical direction in FIG. 21). Similarly, the air introduction body 117 has protrusions 117 a and 117 b (projection part 117 b not shown) protruding in the outer circumferential direction of the air introduction body 117 in order to fix the air introduction mechanism 510. They are arranged symmetrically about the axis (arranged on the front side and the heel side in the vertical direction in FIG. 21). The protrusions 116 a, 116 b, 117 a, and 117 b have the end surface on the ink storage chamber 111 side protruding in the vertical direction (Z direction) with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the ink supply body 116 or the outer peripheral surface of the air introduction body 117. The protruding tip is formed to be inclined to the outer peripheral surface of the ink supply body 116 or the outer peripheral surface of the air introduction body 117. That is, when the ink supply mechanism 500 and the air introduction mechanism 510 are attached to the ink supply body 116 and the air introduction body 117, the ink supply mechanism 500 and the air introduction mechanism 510 can be prevented from being easily detached.

  Next, components of the ink supply mechanism 500 and the air introduction mechanism 510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 is an exploded view of the ink supply mechanism 500 and the air introduction mechanism 510. FIG. 22A is an exploded view of the ink supply mechanism 500. FIG. 22B is an exploded view of the air introduction mechanism 510. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 22A, in the ink supply mechanism 500, the supply cap 600 attached to the ink supply body 116 and the needle 49 (see FIG. 2) of the multi-function device 1 (see FIG. 1) are inserted. A supply joint 610 made of a resin material having elasticity such as rubber, a supply valve 620 that closes the ink flow path when the supply joint 610 comes into contact with the bottom wall, and the supply valve 620 is housed in the supply valve 620. A first supply spring 630 made of a resinous elastic material, and a uniaxial direction that covers the open surface of the supply valve 620 and is the moving direction of the supply valve 620 pressed by the needle 49 (arrow O1 in FIG. 22A) Direction, hereinafter also referred to as “the direction of the axis O1 of the ink supply mechanism 500”. As is apparent from FIG. A supply slider 640 operable in parallel with the X direction when assembled, a second supply spring 650 housed in the supply slider 640 and formed of the same material and shape as the first supply spring 630, and A valve seat 660 that contacts the second supply spring 650 and receives the check valve 670, and a cover 680 that covers the check valve 670 between the valve seat 660. The supply valve 620, the first supply spring 630, the supply slider 640, and the second supply spring 650 form a supply valve mechanism 501 that actually operates.

  As shown in FIG. 22B, the air introduction mechanism 510 includes an air cap 700 attached to the air introduction body 117, an air joint 710 made of a resin material having elasticity such as rubber, and the air. When the joint 710 and the bottom wall come into contact with each other, the ink flow path is closed, and the back surface of the multifunction device 1 is mounted when the ink cartridge 14 is mounted on the multifunction device 1 (refill unit 13, see FIG. 1). 56 (see FIG. 5), an atmospheric valve 720 that opens an atmospheric flow path (passage), a first atmospheric spring 730 that is housed in the atmospheric valve 720 and is made of a resinous elastic material, One axial direction (the direction of arrow O2 in FIG. 22B), which is the moving direction of the atmospheric valve 720 that covers and presses the open surface of the valve 720, hereinafter referred to as “the axis O2 direction of the atmospheric supply mechanism 510”. As is apparent from FIG. 14, the atmospheric air supply mechanism 510 is operable in the X direction when the ink cartridge 14 is incorporated, and an atmospheric slider 740 that is accommodated in the atmospheric slider 740 and is first accommodated. And a second atmospheric spring 750 formed of the same material and in the same shape as the atmospheric spring 730. Note that the atmospheric valve mechanism 511 in which the atmospheric valve 720, the first atmospheric spring 730, the atmospheric slider 740, and the second atmospheric spring 750 are actually operated.

  23 to 33, a supply cap 600, a supply joint 610, a supply valve 620, first and second supply springs 630 and 650, a supply slider 640, a valve seat 660, a check valve 670, a cover 680, atmospheric cap 700, atmospheric joint 710, atmospheric valve 720, first and second atmospheric springs 730 and 750, and atmospheric slider 740 will be described.

  FIG. 23 is a view showing the supply cap 600, FIG. 23 (a) is a view showing a side surface of the supply cap 600, and FIG. 23 (b) is a view in the direction of arrow XXIIIb in FIG. 23 (a). FIG. 23C is a diagram illustrating a side surface of the supply cap 600, FIG. 23C is a diagram illustrating a plane of the supply cap 600, and FIG. 23D is a diagram illustrating a bottom surface of the supply cap 600; FIG. 23E is a cross-sectional view of the supply cap 600 taken along the line XXIIIe-XXIIIe in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 23A, the supply cap 600 is formed in a two-stage shape when viewed from the side (viewed in the vertical direction in FIG. 23A), and the upper portion of FIG. The lower portion of FIG. 23B is an ink storage space for preventing ink dripping to the outside of the ink cartridge 14. An ink reservoir 602.

  The supply fixing portion 601 is formed from the connection portion of the ink reservoir 602 to the vicinity of the upper portion (near the upper end portion in FIG. 23A), and the supply cap 600 is fixed to the ink supply body 116 (see FIG. 21). In this case, engagement holes 603a and 603b (see FIG. 23B for the engagement holes 601b) that engage with the protrusions 116a and 116b (see FIG. 21) of the ink supply body 116 are formed.

  As shown in FIG. 23B, the supply fixing portion 601 is formed side by side on a straight line that is substantially orthogonal to the straight line connecting the engagement holes 603a and 603b (with respect to the axis O1 of the ink supply mechanism 500). A pair of supply cap notches 604a and 604b (supply cap notches) cut from the upper surface of the supply adhering portion 601 (the upper end surface in FIG. 23 (b)) toward the ink reservoir 602. 604b is formed as shown in FIG. 23 (c).

  As shown in the front view of FIG. 23 (c) and the bottom view of FIG. 23 (d), a needle 49 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, is inserted into the approximate center position of the ink reservoir 602 of the supply cap 600. An insertion hole 605 is formed. As shown in FIG. 23C, the circle from the insertion hole 605 to the outer circle is a first upper wall 606 a that forms the upper end surface of the ink reservoir 602, and the first upper wall 606 a is From the outer circle to be formed to one outer circle is an inclined wall 606b that forms an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the bottom surface of the ink reservoir 602, and one outer side from the outer circle that forms the inclined wall 606b. The lower wall 606c that forms the lower end surface of the ink storage portion 602 is formed up to the circle, and the lower end surface of the supply fixing portion 601 is formed from the outer circle that forms the lower wall 606c to the one outer circle. The second upper wall 606d forms the upper end surface of the ink reservoir 602, and the portion connecting the lower wall 606c and the second upper wall 606d is the outer peripheral wall 606e that forms the outer peripheral surface of the ink reservoir 602. . The inclined wall 606b becomes a cylindrical portion inside the ink reservoir 602, and the outer peripheral wall 606e connected to the inclined wall 606b by the lower wall 606c is an inclined wall 606b (inner cylindrical portion). It becomes the outer cylindrical part which surrounds.

  Further, in FIG. 23D, since the inclined wall 606b is inclined downward, the insertion opening of the needle 49 is reduced in diameter toward the insertion hole 605 with the opening 600a serving as the final outlet of the ink being the maximum diameter. As shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. Therefore, when the needle 49 is inserted, the needle 49 is inserted while being guided by the inclined surface formed in the tapered shape, so that the needle 49 is smoothly inserted. Therefore, the inner peripheral surface of the inclined wall 606b on the axis O1 side is an insertion path into which the needle 49 (see FIG. 2) is inserted. Further, an ink storage in which ink can be stored (stored) between a range t7 shown in FIGS. 23C and 23E (that is, a space formed by the inclined wall 606b, the lower wall 606c, and the outer peripheral wall 606e). Part 607.

  When the supply cap 600 is attached to the ink supply body 116 (see FIG. 21), since the protrusions 116a and 116b of the ink supply body 116 protrude in the outer peripheral direction, the diameter of the supply cap 600 increases in the outer peripheral direction. Installation is performed while. Since the supply cap notches 604a and 604b are formed, the diameter of the supply cap 600 is increased in the direction in which the engaging portions 603a and 603b are separated from each other. Therefore, when attaching the supply cap 600, it can carry out without applying a strong pressure, Therefore The mounting efficiency can be improved, reducing the damage of the supply cap 600. FIG.

  24 is a view showing the supply joint 610, FIG. 24A is a view showing a side surface of the supply joint 610, and FIG. 24B is a view showing a plane of the supply joint 610. FIG. 24C is a view showing the bottom surface of the supply joint 610, and FIG. 24D is a cross-sectional view of the supply joint 610 along the line XXIVd-XXIVd in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 24A, the supply joint 610 is formed in three stages in a side view (see FIG. 24A in a direction perpendicular to the paper surface). The portion shown in the lowermost step (lower side in FIG. 24A) is in contact with the second upper wall 606d of the ink reservoir 602 of the supply cap 600 (see FIG. 23) and the inner peripheral surface of the supply fixing portion 601. A joint outer peripheral portion 611 that is a contact portion and forms the outer peripheral portion of the supply joint 610. The joint outer peripheral portion 611 is a portion that is sandwiched between the second upper wall 606 d of the supply cap 600 and the outer end surface of the ink supply body 116 when the supply cap 600 is fixed to the ink supply body 116. . The portion shown in the upper stage of the joint outer peripheral portion 611 is a joint inner peripheral portion 612 that is press-fitted into the ink supply body 116 (see FIG. 21) and forms the inner peripheral portion of the supply joint 610. FIG. 24 (a) shows the upper part of the joint inner periphery 612. Furthermore, the part shown in the upper stage of the joint inner peripheral part 612 is a joint contact part 613 that contacts the supply valve 620 (see FIG. 25). The supply joint 610 is made of an elastic material such as resin rubber.

  As shown in FIG. 24B, the shaft center of the supply joint 610 is located on the shaft center O1 of the ink supply mechanism 500, and the joint contact portion 613, from the shaft center O1 toward the outer peripheral direction. The joint inner periphery 612 and the joint outer periphery 611 are formed in this order.

  As shown in FIG. 24D, a joint contact portion 613 protrudes from the upper surface 612a of the joint inner peripheral portion 612 (the surface on the side in contact with the supply valve 620). The joint abutting portion 613 is formed to be thinner toward the tip end portion 613a (upper end portion in FIG. 24D), and the tip end portion 613a abuts against the bottom surface of the supply valve 620 to block the ink flow path. To do. Further, the joint inner peripheral portion 612 is formed on the joint protrusion 614 protruding from the inner peripheral surface toward the axis O1 and the bottom surface 612b of the joint inner peripheral portion 612 (the lower side in FIG. 24D). An opening 612c serving as an insertion opening for the needle 49 (see FIG. 2) and a step-like insertion passage 612d formed between the opening 612c and the joint projection 614 are formed. As shown in FIG. 24C, the step-shaped portion of the insertion passage 612d is formed at substantially equal intervals from the axis O1 in the outer peripheral direction. The inner peripheral surface 614a of the joint protrusion 614 is provided in parallel to the direction of the axis O1 of the ink supply mechanism 500, and the step surface 614b is provided in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the axis O1. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 24D, the supply joint 610 penetrates from the bottom surface 612b of the joint inner peripheral portion 612 to the tip portion 613a of the joint contact portion 613 (from the upper side to the lower side in FIG. 24D). An ink flow path 615 is formed. The ink flow path 615 includes an opening 612c formed in the bottom surface 612b, a stepped flow path 615a defined by a step-shaped insertion path 612d connected to the opening 612c, and a joint protrusion connected to the insertion path 612d. The protrusion channel 615b defined by the inner peripheral surface 614a of the portion 614, the step surface 614b provided continuously with the inner peripheral surface 614a of the joint protrusion 614, and the joint contact portion 613 provided continuously with the step surface 614b. It is comprised from the contact part flow path 615c demarcated by the internal peripheral surface 613b.

  The staircase portion channel 615a has a lower half formed in a step shape in the direction of the axis O1, and an upper half formed in a taper shape toward the protruding portion channel 615b. Further, the staircase channel 615a is formed in a staircase shape whose diameter gradually decreases from the opening 612c toward the connecting portion with the inner peripheral surface 614a of the joint projection 614. Since the lower part of the staircase channel 615a is formed in a staircase shape, even if the needle 49 (see FIG. 2) is removed and a small amount of ink flows through the ink channel 615, the corner of the staircase Ink can be held by the capillary force due to the ink and the ink can be prevented from dripping out of the supply joint 610. Further, even when the ink drops from the tip of the needle 49 into the ink flow path 615 when the needle 49 is pulled out, the dripping can be prevented similarly. In the present embodiment, since the supply cap 600 includes the ink reservoir 602, the stepped portion of the lower half of the staircase channel 615a may be tapered.

  The protrusion channel 615b is a channel having a minimum inner diameter of the ink channel 615, and is formed in a substantially hollow cylindrical shape. The inner diameter of the projection channel 615b is slightly smaller than the diameter of the needle 49 (see FIG. 2). The contact part flow path 615 c is formed in a substantially hollow cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than that of the protrusion part flow path 615 b, and the inner diameter is sufficiently larger than the diameter of the needle 49. Then, the step surface 614b is formed at the boundary between the protruding portion flow path 615b and the abutting portion flow path 615c, so that the inner diameter in the direction of the axis O1 from the protruding portion flow path 615b to the contacting portion flow path 615c rapidly It has changed. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 24 (d), the joint contact portion 613 has a structure that is notched in a staggered shape by the inner peripheral surface 613b and the stepped surface 614b. A tip end portion 613a of the joint contact portion 613 is positioned around the periphery.

  The needle 49 inserted from the opening 612c is guided by the upper portion of the staircase channel 615a formed in a tapered shape and is inserted into the protrusion channel 615b. At this time, since the inner diameter of the protruding portion flow path 615b is slightly smaller than the diameter of the needle 49, the needle 49 protrudes in close contact with the inner peripheral surface 614a of the joint protruding portion 614 forming the protruding portion flow path 615b. It press-fits so that the partial flow path 615b may be expanded. That is, the joint projection 614 acts to seal the periphery of the needle 49 press-fitted into the projection channel 615b. If the area of the portion of the supply joint 610 that is elastically in close contact with the outer periphery of the needle 49 increases, the resistance when the ink cartridge 14 is attached to the multi-function device 1 (see FIG. 1) increases, and smooth attachment is achieved. It becomes impossible. However, in this embodiment, since the joint protrusion 614 is provided and the needle 49 is brought into contact only with the inner peripheral surface 614a, the contact surface with the needle 49 can be reduced, and the multifunctional device 1 can be reduced. Installation can be performed smoothly. In addition, since the needle 49 is inserted through the ink flow path 615, the flow path through which the ink actually flows is inside the needle 49. In addition, by forming the contact portion flow path 615c in a counterbore shape, the displacement of the supply joint 610 in the direction of the axis O1 when the needle 49 is inserted can be reduced.

  FIG. 25 is a view showing the supply valve 620, FIG. 25 (a) is a view showing a side surface of the supply valve 620, and FIG. FIG. 25C is a diagram illustrating a plane of the supply valve 620, and FIG. 25D is a diagram illustrating a bottom surface of the supply valve 620. FIG. FIG. 25E is a cross-sectional view of the supply valve 620 taken along the line XXVe-XXVe in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 25A, the supply valve 620 includes a valve bottom wall 621 that forms the bottom surface of the supply valve 620 (the lower side surface in FIG. 25A), and the ink supply mechanism 500 (see FIG. 25) from the valve bottom wall 621. 22) and a valve outer peripheral wall 622 standing along the direction of the axis O1.

  The valve outer peripheral wall 622 is formed with a pair of valve guide grooves 623 into which the slider loose insertion portion 643 of the supply slider 640 (see FIG. 27) is loosely inserted. As shown in FIG. 25C, the pair of valve guide grooves 623 are formed symmetrically with respect to the axis O1 of the ink supply mechanism 500. Further, as shown in FIG. 25A, the valve outer peripheral wall 622 is formed with a valve protruding wall 624 that protrudes from the upper portion of the valve outer peripheral wall 622 in the direction opposite to the valve bottom wall 621 in the axial center O1 direction. The valve guide groove 623 is formed from the tip of the valve protruding wall 624 to the vicinity of the lower portion of the valve outer peripheral wall 622. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the slider loose insertion portion 643 from coming off the valve guide groove 623 by securing a long distance for the valve guide groove 623.

  The valve outer peripheral wall 622 is connected to a pair of valve restricting portions 625 that project in the opposite direction of the valve bottom wall 621 and restrict the operation of the supply slider 640. Each of the valve restricting portions 625 is provided with a valve hook portion 626 that protrudes from its tip (tip of the upper portion in FIG. 25A) toward the axis O <b> 1 and engages with the supply slider 640.

  Further, the valve outer peripheral wall 622 protrudes in a semicircular shape in the outer peripheral direction, and four valve protrusions 622 a formed from the upper part to the lower part of the valve outer peripheral wall 622 are arranged at equal intervals along the valve outer peripheral wall 622. Is formed. The valve protrusion 622a is provided to smoothly operate the supply valve 620 when the supply valve 620 is inserted into the ink supply body 116 (see FIG. 21). Without the valve protrusion 622a, the inner peripheral surface of the ink supply body 116 and the valve outer peripheral wall 622 may come into contact with each other. Therefore, the contact area with the ink supply body 116 increases, and the resistance during operation increases. End up. Therefore, by providing the semi-circular protruding valve protrusion 622a, only the valve protrusion 622a comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the ink supply body 116, and the operation of the supply valve 620 in the ink supply body 116 is performed. Becomes smooth.

  Further, the valve restricting portion 625 and the valve protruding wall 624 are formed to extend upward from the valve outer peripheral wall 622. As a result, it is possible to prevent the supply slider 640 from shifting in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the axis O1. Further, since the operation of the supply slider 640 in the direction of the axis O1 is restricted by the valve restricting portion 625, the first supply spring 630 can be reliably stored and operated.

  As shown in FIG. 25C, the valve bottom wall 621 corresponds to the valve guide groove 623 and the valve restricting portion 625 when viewed in the direction of the axis O1 of the ink supply mechanism 500 (FIG. 25C). The four ink flow paths 627 that communicate with the valve bottom wall 621 in the vertical direction (FIG. 25C, the direction perpendicular to the paper surface) are formed at the positions. Further, the valve bottom wall 621 protrudes upward from the bottom surface thereof (FIG. 25 (c), the front side in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface), and is a valve receiving portion 628 that is a base that receives the spring upper portion 632 of the first supply spring 630 (see FIG. 26). It has. The valve receiving portion 628 is composed of two plate-like members arranged substantially in parallel on the valve bottom wall 621. In addition, as shown in FIG. 25 (e), the height of the valve receiving portion 628 in the direction of the axis O <b> 1 is extremely low with respect to the valve outer peripheral wall 622. The valve receiver 628 is provided to prevent the first supply spring 630 from coming into contact with the valve bottom wall 621 when the first supply spring 630 is disposed in the space inside the valve outer peripheral wall 622. This is because if the first supply spring 630 comes into contact with the valve bottom wall 621, the ink flow path is blocked and the ink does not flow. Therefore, the valve receiving portion 628 is provided to secure the ink flow path, and the first supply spring 630 does not have to abut against the valve bottom wall 621. Thus, the size of the ink supply mechanism 500 in the direction of the axis O1 is prevented from increasing.

  A valve inner peripheral wall 629 formed in a substantially arc shape covering the outer peripheral surface of the spring upper portion 632 of the first supply spring 630 is provided outside the valve receiving portion 628 and inside the ink flow path 627. The valve inner peripheral wall 629 is provided to restrict the movement of the first supply spring 630 in the direction orthogonal to the axis O1 and the movement of the first supply spring 630 in the direction orthogonal to the axis O1. By restricting, the first supply spring 630 is accurately bent in the direction of the axis O1.

  26 is a view showing the first supply spring 630, FIG. 26 (a) is a view showing a side surface of the first supply spring 630, and FIG. 26 (b) is a view showing the first supply spring 630. FIG. 26C is a diagram illustrating a bottom surface of the first supply spring 630, and FIG. 26D is a first supply along the line XXVId-XXVId in FIG. 26B. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a spring 630. FIG.

  The first supply spring 630 is formed on the substantially reverse bowl side (or substantially hollow conical shape), and has a ring-shaped spring bottom 631 that forms the bottom surface (end of the larger diameter) of the first supply spring 630, A ring-shaped spring top 632 that is formed to have a diameter smaller than the diameter of the spring bottom 631 and that forms the top (smaller end) of the upper surface of the first supply spring 630, and the spring top 632 and the spring bottom 631 and a movement direction of the supply valve 620 pressed in the direction of the axis O1 of the ink supply mechanism 500 (the needle 49 (see FIG. 2)), and the first supply spring 630 and the second supply spring. And a spring flexible portion 633 which is bent and deformed when a load of 650 is applied. The spring upper portion 632 is in contact with the valve receiving portion 628 of the supply valve 620 (see FIG. 25) and serves as a pressing portion that presses the supply valve 620 in the direction of the supply joint 610 (see FIG. 24). Since the diameter of the spring bottom 631 is larger than the diameter of the spring top 632, the spring bottom 631 serves as a base when the spring flexible portion 633 is elastically deformed.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (d), the first supply spring 630 communicated from the tip of the spring upper part 632 (FIG. 26 (d) right end surface) to the bottom surface of the spring bottom 631 (FIG. 26 (d) left end surface). An ink flow path 634 is formed. The ink flow path 634 includes an upper flow path 634 a defined by the inner peripheral surface of the spring upper part 632, a flexible part flow path 634 b defined by the inner peripheral surface of the spring flexible part 633, and an inner part of the spring bottom 631. And a bottom channel 634c defined by the peripheral surface. The opening area of the ink flow path 634 gradually increases from the tip of the spring upper portion 632 toward the bottom surface of the spring bottom portion 631 as shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 26B and 26C, the upper flow path 634a of the spring upper portion 632 is formed in a circular shape when viewed in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface. In addition, by curving the spring flexible portion 633 so as to protrude toward the side away from the axis O1 and forming a substantially inverted bowl shape, the spring flexible portion 633 has a substantially conical shape, compared with the case where the spring flexible portion 633 is substantially conical. The spring flexible portion 633 is easily bent.

  Note that the cross-sectional shape of the upper flow path 634a of the spring upper portion 632 may be formed in a substantially rectangular shape. If the opening of the upper channel 634a is formed in a substantially square shape, the influence of bubbles contained in the ink can be reduced. Here, since the bubbles contained in the ink are spheres, and the flow path is blocked by bubbles that grow larger than the inner diameter of the upper flow path 634a, the ink flow path (passage) disappears and the ink is normally discharged. It cannot be sent to the multi-function device 1 (see FIG. 1). As a result, the printing quality of the multi-function device 1 is degraded. However, by forming the opening of the upper flow path 634a in a substantially square shape, even if bubbles that grow large on the opening surface of the upper flow path 634a stop, the four corners are not blocked, so the ink flow path is blocked. It is possible to prevent the printing quality from deteriorating. Further, the opening surface of the upper flow path 634a is not limited to a quadrangle, and may be formed in a polygonal shape such as a hexagon or a star shape, and even if it is circular as in this embodiment, the influence of bubbles is reduced. It is good also as what forms in a diameter.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (d), the spring upper part 632 is formed in a relatively thick cylindrical shape extending in the direction of the axis O1, and the direction of the axis O1 (the biasing direction of the first supply spring 630). ) And the vertical cross-sectional shape are uniform. Similarly, the spring bottom 631 is also formed in a relatively thick cylindrical shape extending in the direction of the axis O1, and the cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the direction of the axis O1 is uniform.

  As shown in FIG. 26D, the spring flexible portion 633 is formed in a substantially inverted bowl shape (or substantially conical shape) that is curved (or inclined) at a predetermined angle with respect to the direction of the axis O1. As a result, compared to the spring bottom 631 and the spring top 632, the strength against the load in the direction of the axis O1 is weak. In addition, since the thickness of the spring flexible portion 633 is thinner than that of the spring bottom 631 and the spring upper portion 632, the strength is also weakened by this. Therefore, when the first supply spring 630 is elastically deformed, the spring flexible portion 633 is bent and deformed.

  The second supply spring 650 is formed in the same shape as the first supply spring 630, and the second supply spring 650 includes a spring bottom portion 651, a spring top portion 652, a spring flexible portion 653, and an ink flow path 654. (Upper channel 654a, flexible channel 654b, and bottom channel 654c). Further, the first atmospheric spring 730 and the second supply spring 750 are also formed in the same shape as the first supply spring 630, and have spring bottom portions 731 and 751, spring top portions 732 and 752, and spring flexible portions 733 and 753, respectively. And ink flow paths 734 and 754 (upper flow paths 734a and 754a, flexible flow paths 734b and 754b, and bottom flow paths 734c and 754c).

  27 is a view showing the supply slider 640, FIG. 27 (a) is a view showing a side surface of the supply slider 640, and FIG. 27 (b) is a view as seen from an arrow XXVIIb in FIG. FIG. 27C is a diagram illustrating a side surface of the supply slider 640, FIG. 27C is a diagram illustrating a plane of the supply slider 640, and FIG. 27D is a diagram illustrating a bottom surface of the supply slider 640, FIG. 27E is a cross-sectional view of the supply slider 640 along the line XXVIIe-XXVIIe in FIG.

  The supply slider 640 is formed of a resin material having a hardness higher than that of the first supply spring 630 (see FIG. 26) and the second supply spring 650, a slider outer peripheral wall 641 that forms the outer periphery of the supply slider 640, and the slider A pair of slider projecting walls 642a and 642b projecting from the outer peripheral wall 641 in the direction of the axis O1 of the ink supply mechanism 500, and extending from the slider outer peripheral wall 641 to the upper end of the slider projecting wall 642a (the upper end surface in FIG. 27A). A pair of slider loose insertion portions 643 that are loosely inserted into the valve guide groove 623 (see FIG. 25) of the supply valve 620 and the slider outer peripheral wall 641, and the first and second supply springs 630 and 650. The first and second supply springs 630 and 650 are arranged on both side surfaces in contact with the spring bottoms 631 and 651. A slider pedestal portion 644 which is formed at the center position of the slider pedestal portion 644, and a slider through hole 645 for communicating the upper and lower slider pedestal portion 644 mainly includes. As is clear from FIG. 27C, the slider projecting walls 642a and 642b are positioned on the object with the axis O1 interposed therebetween, and the pair of slider insertion portions 643 are also positioned on the object with the axis O1 interposed therebetween. Yes.

  The inner diameter of the slider outer peripheral wall 641 is formed substantially equal to the outer diameter of the spring bottoms 631 and 651 of the first and second supply springs 630 and 650, and the slider protruding walls 642a and 642b are pivoted from the slider outer peripheral wall 641. Since the first and second supply springs 630 and 650 are disposed, the first and second springs 630 and 650 are formed in a direction orthogonal to the axis O1 of the first and second springs 630 and 650. Movement is restricted. Therefore, the first and second springs 630 and 650 are reliably elastically deformed in the direction of the axis O1.

  The slider loose insertion portion 643 is formed so as to extend in the direction of the axis O1 of the supply slider 640 (it is formed across the slider outer peripheral wall 641 and the slider protrusion 642), so that the valve guide groove 623 ( 25), the supply slider 640 can be smoothly moved in the direction of the axis O1 and can be prevented from being displaced in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the axis O1.

  28 is a view showing the valve seat 660, FIG. 28 (a) is a view showing a side surface of the valve seat 660, and FIG. 28 (b) is a view showing a plane of the valve seat 660. FIG. 28C is a view showing the bottom surface of the valve seat 660, and FIG. 28D is a cross-sectional view of the valve seat 660 along the line XXVIIId-XXVIIId in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 28A, the valve seat 660 forms the bottom surface of the valve seat 660, and contacts the spring top 632 of the second supply spring 650, and the valve seat bottom 661. And a valve seat receiving portion 662 disposed on the upper surface (upper side in FIG. 28A). The valve seat receiving portion 662 includes a valve seat inclined surface 662a that is inclined downward toward the center of the valve seat 660, and a check valve 670 described later is received by the valve seat inclined surface 662a.

  As shown in FIG. 28B, six valve seat receiving portions 662 are formed at predetermined equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the valve seat 660. Further, of the six valve seat receiving portions 662, three valve seat receiving portions 662 are formed with first valve seat through holes 662 b penetrating the front and back of the valve seat 660. The first valve seat through hole 662b is formed in a portion other than the valve seat inclined surface 662a of the valve seat receiving portion 662 (horizontal portion of the valve seat receiving portion 662). Therefore, since the first valve seat through hole 662b is formed in a portion different from the portion that receives the check valve 670, it is possible to prevent the ink flow path from being blocked.

  A second valve seat through hole 663 that penetrates the valve seat bottom 661 is formed between the valve seat receiving portions 662 of the valve seat 660. In FIG. 28 (b), the second valve seat through hole 663 is 6 symmetrically with respect to a center line (center line Q shown in FIG. 28) passing through the axis O1 of the ink supply mechanism 500 (see FIG. 22). Individually formed. The second valve seat through hole 663 becomes an ink flow path through which ink flows.

  As shown in FIG. 28 (c), a concave valve seat communication groove 664 that communicates with each second valve seat through hole 663 is formed on the bottom surface of the valve seat bottom portion 661. The valve seat communication groove 664 communicates the second valve seat through-holes 663 in a substantially straight line on the bottom surface of the valve seat bottom portion 661. Accordingly, the valve seat bottom 661 is formed with three valve seat communication grooves 664 that intersect at the axis O1. A pair of valve seat protrusions 665 protruding from the bottom surface are formed on the bottom surface of the valve seat bottom 661. The valve seat protrusion 665 houses a spring upper portion 652 of the second supply spring, and comes into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the spring upper portion 652 of the second spring 650 so as to be orthogonal to the axis O1 of the second supply spring 650. Movement in the direction is restricted.

  As shown in FIG. 28 (d), a gap is formed in the direction of the axis O1 between the valve seat inclined surface 662a of the valve seat receiving portion 662 and the second valve seat through hole 663. Therefore, even when the check valve 670 is supported by the valve seat inclined surface 662a, an ink flow path is secured. Even when the end surface of the spring upper portion 632 of the second supply spring 650 is in contact with the bottom surface of the second valve seat through-hole 663, the second valve seat through-hole 663 is an imaginary circumference of the valve seat protrusion 665. Since it is located outside the virtual line R (FIG. 28C), an ink flow path is secured by the valve seat communication groove 664. In addition, since the valve seat communication groove 664 communicates with all the second valve seat through holes 663, the ink flow path is ensured even if there is the second valve seat through hole 663 surrounded by the valve seat protrusion 665. Secured.

  FIG. 29 is a view showing the check valve 670, FIG. 29A is a view showing the side surface of the check valve 670, and FIG. 29B is a plan view of the check valve 670. FIG. 29C is a view showing the bottom surface of the check valve 670, and FIG. 29C is a cross-sectional view of the check valve 670 along the line XXIXd-XXIXd in FIG. It is.

  The check valve 670 is formed in a substantially umbrella shape in a side view (viewed in the vertical direction in FIG. 29A), and includes an umbrella portion 671 and a shaft portion 672. The umbrella part 671 closes the ink flow path by contacting the cover 680 (see FIG. 30), and is connected to the shaft part 672 as shown in FIGS. 29 (b) and 29 (d). A connecting portion 671a and a blade portion 671b extending from the connecting portion 671a in the outer peripheral direction substantially uniformly and formed in a thin shape are provided. Therefore, when contacting the cover 680, the thin blade 671b is in close contact with the cover 680 while being elastically deformed. Can be blocked.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 29A, the lower surface of the umbrella portion 671 is curved and is supported by the valve seat receiving portion 662 (see FIG. 28) of the valve seat 660, so that the umbrella portion 671 is provided. Is supported by the valve seat receiving portion 662 of the valve seat 660, the ink flow path is opened, and when the umbrella portion 671 of the check valve 670 is in contact with the cover 680, the ink flow The road is blocked.

  The shaft portion 672 is a portion that is inserted into a second cover communication hole 684 (see FIG. 30) of the cover 680 described later. The shaft portion 672 has a spherical portion 672a formed in a substantially spherical shape, located in the vicinity of the cover 680 when attached to the cover 680. The ball portion 672a is formed to have a diameter larger than the diameter of the second cover communication hole 684 of the cover 680, and prevents the check valve 670 from falling off once the check valve 670 is attached to the cover 680. . Therefore, it is possible to reduce the loss of the check valve 670 when the ink cartridge 14 is manufactured, and it is possible to improve workability.

  30 is a view showing the cover 680, FIG. 30 (a) is a view showing a side surface of the cover 680, and FIG. 30 (b) is a view showing a plane of the cover 680. 30 (c) is a view showing the bottom surface of the cover 680, and FIG. 30 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the cover 680 along the line XXXd-XXXd in FIG. 30 (b).

  The cover 680 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape having an open bottom surface (the valve seat 660 (see FIG. 28) side). The cover 680 includes a cover outer peripheral wall 681 that forms the outer periphery of the cover 680 and a cover upper portion 682 that forms the upper surface of the cover 680 (upper side in FIG. 30A), and the lower surface is open. In the cover 680, the valve seat 660 is fitted into an opening on the lower surface (the lower side in FIG. 30A), and the check valve 670 is accommodated between the valve seat 660 and the cover 680. That is, a space for accommodating the check valve 670 is formed by the cover 680 and the valve seat 660.

  As shown in FIG. 30 (b) or FIG. 30 (c), the cover upper portion 682 has six first cover through holes 683 penetrating the front and back of the cover 680 in the circumferential direction with respect to the axis O1. ing. The first cover through-hole 683 becomes a flow path through which ink flows, and the umbrella portion 671 (see FIG. 29) of the check valve 670 contacts the cover upper portion 682, so that the first cover through-hole 683 is closed, The ink flow path is blocked.

  Further, a second cover through hole 684 through which the shaft portion 672 of the check valve 670 is inserted is formed at the center of the cover upper portion 682 (a position passing through the axis O1 of the ink supply mechanism 500). The shaft portion 672 of the check valve 670 is inserted into the second cover through hole 684, and the check valve 670 is assembled. Even if the check valve 670 is inserted in the second cover through-hole 684, an ink flow path is formed on a part of the inner peripheral surface thereof. However, when the umbrella portion 671 of the check valve 670 comes into contact with the cover upper portion 682, the entire first cover through-hole 683 is closed, so that the ink flow path of the second cover through-hole 684 formed at the center is also the same. Blocked.

  FIG. 31 is a view showing the atmospheric cap 700, FIG. 31 (a) is a view showing a side surface of the atmospheric cap 700, and FIG. FIG. 31C is a diagram illustrating a side surface of the atmospheric cap 700, FIG. 31C is a diagram illustrating a plane of the atmospheric cap 700, and FIG. 31D is a diagram illustrating a bottom surface of the atmospheric cap 700; FIG. 31E is a cross-sectional view of the atmospheric cap 700 taken along the line XXXIe-XXXIe in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 31A, the atmospheric cap 700 forms a side wall of the atmospheric cap 700 and is fixed to the atmospheric introduction body 117 (see FIG. 21). And an atmospheric cap bottom wall 702 forming a bottom wall 700. The air adhering portion 701 is formed from the lower portion (lower side of FIG. 31A) to the vicinity of the upper portion (near the upper end portion of FIG. 31A), and an air cap 700 is introduced into the air. When fixed to the body 117, engagement holes 703a and 703b (see FIG. 31B for the engagement hole 703b) that are engaged with the projections 117a and 117b of the air introduction body 117 described above are formed. .

  As shown in FIG. 31 (b), the atmosphere fixing portion 701 is formed at a position moved approximately 90 degrees with respect to the axis O2 of the atmosphere introduction mechanism 510 from the position where the engagement holes 703a and 703b are formed. Atmospheric cap notches 704a and 704b (atmospheric cap notch 704b is not shown) cut from the upper end of the atmosphere adhering portion 701 to the vicinity of the lower portion are formed.

  As shown in the plan view of FIG. 31 (c) and the bottom view of FIG. 31 (d), a joint skirt portion 714 (see FIG. 32) of the atmospheric joint 710, which will be described later, is provided at a substantially central position of the atmospheric cap bottom wall 702. ) And an atmospheric cap insertion hole 705 through which the valve opening 721a (see FIG. 33) of the atmospheric valve 720 is inserted. Note that an atmospheric joint 710 (see FIG. 32) is stored in contact with the inner surface of the atmospheric cap bottom wall 702 and the inner peripheral surface of the atmospheric fixing portion 701.

  When the atmospheric cap 700 is attached to the atmospheric introduction body 117, the projections 117a and 117b of the atmospheric introduction body 117 project in the outer circumferential direction as in the case of the supply cap 600. It is attached while expanding the diameter. Therefore, when attaching the atmospheric cap 700, it can be performed without applying a strong pressure, and the mounting efficiency can be improved while reducing the damage of the atmospheric cap 700.

  32 is a view showing the atmospheric joint 710, FIG. 32 (a) is a view showing a side surface of the atmospheric joint 710, and FIG. 32 (b) is a view showing a plane of the atmospheric joint 710. FIG. 32C is a view showing the bottom surface of the atmospheric joint 710, and FIG. 32D is a cross-sectional view of the atmospheric joint 710 taken along the line XXXIId-XXXIId in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 32A, the air joint 710 is formed in four stages in a side view (viewed in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 32A). The portion shown in the second row from the lower side (the lower side of FIG. 32A) is a portion that abuts on the inner peripheral surface of the air adhering portion 701 (see FIG. 31) of the air cap 700 and the air cap bottom wall 702. It is a joint outer peripheral portion 711 that forms the outer peripheral portion of the atmospheric joint 710. The portion shown in the upper stage of the joint outer peripheral portion 711 is a joint inner peripheral portion 712 that is disposed inside the atmospheric introduction body 117 (see FIG. 21) and forms the inner peripheral portion of the atmospheric joint 710, FIG. 32A shows the upper part of the joint inner periphery 712. Further, a portion shown in the upper stage of the joint inner peripheral portion 712 is a joint contact portion 713 that contacts the atmospheric valve 720. Further, the lowermost part is a member that covers the outer surface of the valve opening 721a (see FIG. 33) of the atmospheric valve 720 and is exposed outward from the atmospheric cap 700, and is a thin joint. A skirt portion 714.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (b), the axial centers of the joint outer peripheral portion 711, the joint inner peripheral portion 712, the joint contact portion 713, and the joint skirt portion 714 are on the same axial center as the axial center O2 direction of the air introduction mechanism 510. Is located. Further, since the atmospheric joint 710 is made of an elastic material such as resin rubber, the joint skirt portion 714 formed in a thin shape is used when the ink cartridge 14 is attached to the multi-function device 1 (see FIG. 1). First, it abuts on the end face on the multifunction device 1 side and elastically deforms.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 32 (d), the joint contact portion 713 protrudes from the upper surface 712 a of the joint inner peripheral portion 712 (surface on the side in contact with the atmospheric valve 720). The joint abutting portion 713 is formed to be thinner toward the tip end portion 713a (the upper end portion in FIG. 32 (d)), and the tip end portion 713a abuts against the bottom surface of the atmospheric valve 720 to block the air introduction path. To do. Further, as shown in FIG. 32D, the atmospheric joint 710 has a joint that penetrates from the bottom surface of the joint inner peripheral portion 712 to the tip end portion 713a of the joint contact portion 713 (from the upper side to the lower side in FIG. 32D). A passage 715 is formed, and the valve opening portion 721 a of the atmospheric valve 720 is inserted through the joint passage 715.

  FIG. 33 is a view showing the atmospheric valve 720, FIG. 33 (a) is a view showing the side of the atmospheric valve 720, and FIG. 33 (b) is a view showing the bottom surface of the atmospheric valve 720. is there. The atmospheric valve 720 protrudes from the bottom surface of the valve bottom wall 721 with respect to the supply valve 620, and has a valve opening portion 721a that contacts the multifunction device 1 (see FIG. 1) side to open the atmosphere introduction path. This is an added configuration. Therefore, the valve bottom wall 721, the valve outer peripheral wall 722, the valve protrusion 722a, the valve guide groove 723, the valve protrusion wall 724, the valve restricting portion 725, the valve hook portion 726, the air introduction passage 727 (the portion corresponding to the ink passage 627) ), Detailed description of the valve receiving portion 728 and the valve inner peripheral wall 729 is omitted. In addition, illustration of a portion that cannot be visually recognized by the side view (FIG. 33A) and the bottom view (FIG. 33B) of the atmospheric valve 720 is also omitted.

  The atmospheric valve 720 includes a valve opening 721 a that protrudes from the bottom surface of the valve bottom wall 721. The valve opening portion 721a is located on the axis O2 of the atmosphere introduction mechanism 510 and is formed in a substantially rod shape. Further, the valve opening portion 721a is formed with a substantially semicircular convex portion 721b protruding in the outer peripheral direction from the lower portion (lower end surface in FIG. 22) to the valve bottom wall 721 on the outer peripheral surface thereof. This valve opening portion 721a passes through the joint passage 715 (see FIG. 32) of the above-described atmospheric joint 710, and is further partially exposed outside the atmospheric cap 700 (see FIG. 31). When the ink cartridge 14 is attached to the multi-function device 1 (see FIG. 1), the valve opening portion 721a contacts the end surface of the multi-function device 1, and the joint contact portion 713 (tip portion 713a) of the atmospheric joint 710 Is released and an air introduction path is formed.

  When the ink cartridge 14 is attached to the multi-function device 1 and the valve opening portion 721a is operated, the joint skirt portion 714 of the atmospheric joint 710 is also in contact with the end surface of the multi-function device 1 and elastically deforms, and the air introduction path And communication with the outside of the joint skirt portion 714 is blocked. Therefore, the air introduced from the multi-function device 1 side can be smoothly introduced. Further, even if the joint skirt portion 714 is elastically deformed toward the axis O2 and comes into contact with the valve opening portion 721a, the air introduction path can be secured by the convex portion 721b of the valve opening portion 721a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the atmosphere introduction path from being blocked and the atmosphere from being introduced into the ink storage chamber 111 (see FIG. 14).

  Next, a state where the ink supply mechanism 500 and the air introduction mechanism 510 are assembled to the ink supply body 116 and the air introduction body 117 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a partial cross-sectional view showing a state in which the ink supply mechanism 500 and the air introduction mechanism 510 are assembled to the ink supply body 116 and the air introduction body 117.

  As shown in FIG. 34, the ink supply mechanism 500 is inserted into and attached to the inner peripheral surface 800 of the ink supply body 116, and the atmospheric introduction mechanism 510 is inserted into the inner peripheral surface 810 of the atmospheric introduction body 117. Has been attached.

  First, the ink supply mechanism 500 attached to the ink supply body 116 will be described. On the inner peripheral surface 800 of the ink supply body 116, a protruding wall 801 that protrudes inward of the inner peripheral surface 800 is formed on the first supply communication hole 421 side of the supply path forming portion 420. It is formed in a staircase shape that can accommodate the cover 680. The cover 680 is inserted so as to abut on the stepped surface 801a formed in the stepped shape of the protruding wall 801, and the position of the ink supply mechanism 500 on the first supply communication hole 421 side is determined.

  The shaft portion 672 of the check valve 670 is inserted into the second cover through-hole 684 of the cover 680, and the valve seat 660 is disposed so that the check valve 670 is accommodated in the cover 680. A second supply spring 650 is disposed on the bottom surface side (left side in FIG. 34) of the valve seat 660, and a supply slider 640 is disposed so as to accommodate the second supply spring 650. A first supply spring 630 is accommodated on the opposite side of the supply slider 640 to the second supply spring 650, and the first supply spring 630 is disposed between the supply slider 640 and the supply valve 620. A supply joint 610 is disposed so as to contact the bottom surface of the supply valve 620, and the supply cap 600 is fixed to the outside of the ink supply body 116 so as to contact the bottom surface of the supply joint 610. Since the supply cap 600 is engaged and fixed to the protrusions 116 a and 116 b of the ink supply body 116, the position outside the ink supply mechanism 500 is determined. Therefore, the ink supply mechanism 500 is positioned in the direction of the axis O1 by the supply cap 600 and the step surface 801a of the inner peripheral surface 800 of the ink supply body 116.

  Further, the inner diameter 800 of the inner peripheral surface 800 of the ink supply body 116 is formed slightly larger than the outer diameter of the supply valve 620, and the operation of the supply valve 620 in the direction of the axis O1 is smoothly performed inside the ink supply body 116. It is configured to be As described above, the four valve protrusions 622a are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the supply valve 620 so that the contact area with the inner peripheral surface 800 is reduced. Therefore, even if the supply valve 620 operates in an oblique direction with respect to the axis O1 and contacts the inner peripheral surface 800, it is possible to prevent the supply valve 620 from becoming inoperable. Since a gap is formed between the supply valve 620 and the inner peripheral surface 800, an ink flow path that passes through the inside of the ink supply mechanism 500 and an ink flow path that passes through the outside of the supply valve 620 are formed. . Therefore, the inner peripheral surface 800 of the ink supply body 116 is a space that forms an ink flow path chamber.

  As described above, the slider pedestal portion 644 is sandwiched between the first supply spring 630 and the spring bottom 631 of the second spring member. Further, on the contact side of the spring pedestal 644 with the spring bottom 631 of the second supply spring 650, the supply valve 620 is engaged by the two valve hook portions 626, and movement in the direction of the axis O1 is restricted. . The space formed between the supply valve 620 and the supply slider 640 is shorter than the length of the first supply spring 630 in the axial center O1 direction. Therefore, the first supply spring 630 is attached to the ink supply body 116. Already bent and deformed.

  Next, the air introduction mechanism 510 attached to the air introduction body 117 will be described. The inner peripheral surface 810 of the air introduction body 117 is provided with a protruding portion 811 protruding in the direction of the air introduction mechanism 510 (left direction in FIG. 34) on the end surface of the air introduction path forming portion 430 on the first air communication chamber 431 side. Yes. The protrusion 811 is composed of a pair of plate-like members and abuts against the end surface of the spring upper portion 752 of the second atmospheric spring 750. Therefore, an atmosphere introduction path is formed between the protrusion 811 and the spring upper portion 752 of the second atmosphere spring 750. Further, when the second atmospheric spring 750 comes into contact with the protruding portion 811, the position of the atmospheric introduction mechanism 510 on the first atmospheric communication hole 434 side is determined.

  As in the ink supply mechanism 500 side, the atmospheric air introduction mechanism 510 has an atmospheric slider 740 disposed so as to accommodate the second atmospheric spring 750, and the atmospheric slider 740 has a first atmospheric spring on the opposite side of the first atmospheric spring 750. An atmospheric spring 730 is accommodated, and a first atmospheric spring 730 is disposed between the atmospheric slider 740 and the atmospheric valve 720. Further, an atmospheric joint 710 is disposed so as to contact the bottom surface of the atmospheric valve 720, and the atmospheric cap 700 is fixed to the outside of the atmospheric introduction body 117 so as to contact the bottom surface on the outer peripheral side of the joint skirt portion 714 of the atmospheric joint 710. Is done. Since the atmospheric cap 700 is engaged and fixed with the protrusions 117a and 117b of the atmospheric introduction body 117, the position outside the atmospheric introduction mechanism 510 is determined. Therefore, the atmospheric introduction mechanism 510 is positioned in the direction of the axis O2 by the atmospheric cap 700 and the protrusion 811 of the inner peripheral surface 810 of the atmospheric introduction body 117.

  Since the space formed between the atmospheric valve 720 and the atmospheric slider 740 is shorter than the length of the first atmospheric spring 730 in the axial center O2 direction, the first atmospheric spring 730 is similar to the ink supply mechanism 500. In the state where it is assembled to the air introduction body 117, it has already been bent and deformed.

  Next, a manufacturing process of the ink cartridge 14 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating a manufacturing process before the film 160 is welded. FIG. 36 is a diagram for explaining a welding process of the film 160, FIG. 36 (a) is a diagram for explaining a welding surface of the film 160 to the frame portion 110, and FIG. It is a figure explaining the welding process welded to the flame | frame part. FIG. 37 is a diagram for explaining a manufacturing process performed after the film 160 is welded. FIG. 37A is a diagram for explaining an attachment process for attaching the ink supply mechanism 500 and the air introduction mechanism 510 to the frame portion 110. FIG. 37 (b) is a diagram for explaining the decompression step, and FIG. 37 (c) is a diagram for explaining the ink dispensing step. FIG. 38 is a diagram for explaining a process for assembling the case 200, FIG. 38 (a) is a diagram for explaining a process for holding the case 200 between the frame portions 110, and FIG. 38 (b) is a diagram for explaining the case 200. It is a figure explaining the welding process which welds. FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining a manufacturing process performed before shipment of the ink cartridge 14, FIG. 39 (a) is a diagram for explaining a process for attaching the protector 300, and FIG. 39 (b) is a diagram for explaining the ink cartridge. It is a figure explaining the process of packaging 14 with the packaging bag 930. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 35, in manufacturing the ink cartridge 14, first, the sensor arm 470 is attached to the frame portion 110. In addition, the frame part 110 and the sensor arm 470 are each molded by injection molding in the previous process (molding process). That is, the first molding process (preparation process) in which the frame part 110 is injection-molded and the second molding process (preparation process) in which the sensor arm 470 is injection-molded are respectively molded in advance.

  The sensor arm 470 has an attachment shaft 472a provided in the attachment portion 472 of the sensor arm 470 attached to an arm clamping portion 425 provided in the vicinity of the supply path forming portion 420 of the frame portion 110 (attachment process of the sensor arm 470). , Preparation process). The arm clamping portion 425 is open on the side opposite to the ink supply body 116 side (upper side in FIG. 35). In other words, the opening of the arm holding portion 425 opens toward the second storage chamber opening 114 side. Therefore, since the sensor arm 470 can be attached in a range where the first chamber 111a and the second chamber 111b communicate with each other, there are few interferences and the sensor arm 470 can be attached efficiently. The sensor arm 470 is attached so that the shielding arm portion 473c of the arm portion 473 is housed inside the detection portion 140 (inside the inner packet portion 141). When the sensor arm 470 is attached to the arm holding portion 425, the movable range of the shielding arm portion 473c is vertically and horizontally movable by the walls 141a to 141d of the inner packet portion 141 of the detection unit 140. That is, once the attachment of the sensor arm 470 is completed, the sensor arm 470 is not easily detached, so that the manufacturing work of the ink cartridge 14 can be prevented from being complicated, and the sensor arm 470 can be moved when the ink cartridge is transported. It can prevent coming off from the detection part 140. FIG. Therefore, when the ink cartridge 14 is attached to the multi-function device 1, the ink empty can be reliably detected, and the reliability of the product can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the mounting portion 472 (mounting shaft 472a) of the sensor arm 470 is pivotally supported by the arm clamping portion 425 of the frame portion 110, thereby providing a pivot portion that serves as an axis of rotation of the sensor arm 470. Although it is configured, an attachment shaft may be provided on the frame part 110 side and a clamping part may be provided on the sensor arm 470 side, or a structure may be provided in which the sensor arm 470 and the frame part 110 are attached by hinge coupling. . That is, as long as the sensor arm 470 is attached to the frame 110 so as to be rotatable, the attachment structure may be any structure.

  When the attachment of the sensor arm 470 is completed, the ink dispensing plug 520 is then press-fitted into the dispensing cylinder portion 451 of the ink dispensing unit 150 (press-fitting step and preparation step of the ink dispensing plug 520). The ink dispensing plug 520 is press-fitted so that the outer end surface 520a of the ink dispensing plug 520 is substantially flush with the outer surface of the frame part 110, and is press-fitted to a position where it contacts the bottom 451b of the dispensing cylinder part 451. do not do. As described above, this is because the first dispensing communication hole 452 of the dispensing channel forming portion 450 is formed on the side surface of the dispensing tube portion 451, and the ink dispensing plug 520 is connected to the dispensing tube portion 451. This is because the first dispensing communication hole 452 is blocked when the press-fitting is performed up to the 奧, so that the ink cannot be dispensed. The ink dispensing plug 520 may be attached before the sensor arm 470 is attached.

  As shown in FIG. 36A, when the attachment of the sensor arm 470 and the ink dispensing plug 520 is completed, the film 160 is then welded (the fixing process of the film 160). The film 160 is welded to the frame portion 110 so as to cover the openings on both sides of the first opening 112a and the second opening 112b. That is, the film 160 is attached to the frame portion by two fixing steps including a first fixing step (preparation step) for welding the film 160 to the first opening 112a and a second fixing step for welding the film 160 to the second opening 112b. It is welded to both sides of 110.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 36B, the film 160 is cut to be larger than the outer shape of the frame part 110 and is installed so as to cover the frame part 110. At this time, the film 160 is disposed on the first opening 112a and the second opening 112b without suction by sucking the film 160 from the frame part 110 side with a suction device (not shown). Thereafter, an ultrasonic welding surface 900 of an ultrasonic mounting device (not shown) is installed from above the film 160 so as to cover the outer peripheral portions (outer peripheral welding portions 400a, 400b) of the first and second openings 112a, 112b, and the film 160 is welded to the frame part 110. In addition, as for the welding to each welding part of the film 160, the part (outer periphery welding part 400a, 400b and inner periphery welding part 411a-417a, 411b-417b) of FIG. 37 (a) was welded.

  Since a plurality of inner circumference welded portions 411a to 417a and 411b to 417b are diffused and formed on the inner circumference side of the outer circumference welded portions 400a and 400b, the frame portion 110 is super-corresponding to all the welded portions. When sonic welding is performed, the structure of the ultrasonic welding surface 900 becomes complicated, and the manufacturing cost increases. However, in this embodiment, since the ultrasonic welding surface 900 of the ultrasonic welding apparatus is configured to cover all the welding parts (the outer circumferential welding part and the inner circumferential welding part), the manufacturing cost of the welding process of the film 160 is reduced. It is possible to reduce the increase.

  The film 160 is a two-layer film (hereinafter referred to as “nylon polyethylene”) composed of a nylon film and a polyethylene film, and the side in contact with the frame portion 110 is a polyethylene film layer. Yes. This nylon polyethylene completely blocks the liquid but has a low gas barrier property. Therefore, there is a slight gap between the ink storage chamber 111 substantially sealed by the film 160 and a packaging bag 930 (see FIG. 39B) described later. Gas can be moved back and forth. Therefore, the gas present in the ink in the ink storage chamber 111 can gradually move through the film 160 to the space formed between the inclusion body 930 and the case 200, so that bubbles are generated in the ink. Can be prevented. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the printing quality due to the bubbles in the ink. The film 160 may be made of any material as long as it can maintain strength and has a low gas barrier property. Examples thereof include a film in which a nylon film and a polypropylene film are formed in two layers, and a film formed by mixing nylon and polyethylene or nylon and polypropylene.

  The frame portion 110 is made of polyethylene resin and is made of the same material as the film on the frame portion 110 side of the film 160. By configuring the film 160 and the frame portion 110 with the same material, both the film 160 and the welded portion can be melted and reliably welded during ultrasonic welding. In this embodiment, the film 160 has a two-layer structure. A nylon film is superior in strength to a polyethylene film, but is poor in terms of workability of welding because of its high melting point. Therefore, the film 160 has a two-layer structure made of nylon and polyethylene, so that the strength is ensured, and the polyethylene layer is used as a welding layer to the frame portion 110 to enable welding at a low heating temperature. The sex is secured. In addition, since the nylon layer does not melt during the welding operation, the change in the thickness of the film near the welded portion is reduced, and the strength of the film near the welded portion can be maintained.

  As shown in FIG. 37A, when the film 160 is completely welded, the ink supply mechanism 500 and the air introduction mechanism 510 are then attached to the frame portion 110. The ink supply mechanism 500 is attached to the ink supply body 116 (attachment process and preparation process of the ink supply mechanism 500), and the air introduction mechanism 510 is attached to the air introduction body 117 (attachment process and preparation process of the air introduction mechanism 500). In attaching the ink supply mechanism 500 (attachment process), first, the cover 680, the check valve 670, and the valve seat 660 are integrated into the ink supply body 116 (position where the step surface 801a comes into contact). At this time, the check valve 670 is attached so that the tip of the check valve 670 protrudes into the space surrounded by the supply partition wall 422 through the first supply communication hole 421 (see FIG. 34). Thereafter, the supply joint 600, the supply valve 620, the first supply spring 630, the supply slider 640, and the second supply spring 650 are integrated in the supply cap 600 into the inner peripheral surface 800 of the ink supply body 116. At the same time, the supply cap 600 is fixed to the outer peripheral surface of the ink supply body 116. At this time, the supply cap 600 is pressed toward the ink supply body 116, and the engagement holes 603 a and 603 b of the supply cap 600 are engaged with the protrusions 116 a and 116 b of the ink supply body 116. In the supply joint 610, the joint inner peripheral portion 612 is press-fitted into the inner peripheral surface 800 of the ink supply body 116, and the joint outer peripheral portion 611 is sandwiched between the ink supply body 116 and the supply cap 600. When the attachment of the supply cap 600 to the ink supply body 116 is finished, the attachment of the ink supply mechanism 500 is finished, and the ink supply unit 120 is configured.

  Further, the attachment (attachment process) of the atmosphere introduction mechanism 510 to the atmosphere introduction body 117 is similar to the attachment of the ink supply mechanism 500 to the ink supply body 116, the atmosphere joint 700, the atmosphere valve 720, and the first one. The air spring 730, the air slider 740, and the second air spring 750 are integrated into the inner peripheral surface 810 of the air introduction body 117, and the air cap 700 is fixed to the outer peripheral surface of the air introduction body 117. Is done. At this time, the atmospheric cap 700 is pressed toward the atmospheric introduction body 117, and the fitting holes 703 a and 703 b of the atmospheric cap 700 are fitted into the protrusions 117 a and 117 b of the atmospheric introduction body 117. In the atmosphere joint 710, the joint inner periphery 712 is press-fitted into the inner periphery 810 of the atmosphere introduction body 117, and the joint outer periphery 711 is sandwiched between the atmosphere introduction body 117 and the atmosphere cap 700. When the attachment of the atmosphere cap 700 to the atmosphere introduction body 117 is finished, the attachment of the atmosphere introduction mechanism 510 is finished, and the atmosphere introduction unit 130 is configured.

  As shown in FIG. 37B, when the ink supply mechanism 500 and the air introduction mechanism 510 are attached to the ink supply body 116 and the air introduction body 117 (each attachment step), the frame portion 110 (ink storage chamber 111) is completed. A depressurization step for depressurizing the inside is performed. In this embodiment, the decompression in the frame unit 110 is performed from the ink supply unit 120 side. In order to reduce the pressure in the frame 110, first, the suction pipe 911 of the pressure reducing device 910 is inserted through the supply joint 610 of the ink supply mechanism 500 to press the supply valve 620, thereby opening the ink flow path. Thereafter, the suction pump (P1) 912 is driven to suck the air in the frame part 110. When the atmospheric pressure in the frame part 110 is sucked by the decompression device 910 and reaches a predetermined pressure (at least lower than atmospheric pressure), the suction pump 912 is stopped and the suction pipe 911 is removed from the ink supply part 120. When the suction tube 911 is removed from the ink supply unit 120, the supply valve 620 contacts the joint contact portion 613 of the supply joint 610 by the elastic force of the first and second supply springs 630 and 650, and the ink flow. Since the path is blocked, the decompressed state is maintained.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (c), when the pressure reduction in the frame part 110 is completed by the pressure reducing process, the ink dispensing needle 920 is inserted into the ink dispensing plug 520, and the ink is put into the frame part 110 (ink storage chamber 111). Dispensing (ink dispensing process). Since the inside of the ink storage chamber 111 is depressurized, the ink is vigorously dispensed into the ink storage chamber 111, and when a predetermined amount of ink is dispensed, the dispensing needle 920 is pulled out and the ink dispensing step. Ends. It becomes the atmospheric pressure p1 (first pressure) in the ink storage chamber 111 after the ink is dispensed. In addition, the predetermined amount of ink is an amount in which the ink liquid level I is below the second atmospheric communication hole 435 and the third atmospheric communication hole 436 of the atmospheric communication path forming portion 430, as shown in FIG. is there. Therefore, when ink is dispensed, the ink can be prevented from entering the atmosphere connection path 433. The reason why ink is not dispensed into the ink storage chamber 111 without any gap is to prevent the film 160 from being damaged or deformed as described above. In addition, an ink space in which ink is stored is below the ink level I shown in FIG. 37C, and a space above the ink level I and a space including the atmosphere communication path forming portion 430 are formed. Although it is an atmosphere communication space (decompression space), the shape and size of the ink space and the atmosphere communication space vary depending on the state in which the ink cartridge 14 is placed and the ink remaining amount.

  In addition, since the ink is dispensed in a state where the pressure in the ink storage chamber 111 is reduced by the decompression device 910, the pressure in the ink storage chamber 111 is reduced even after the ink dispensing is completed ( Atmospheric pressure p1). For this reason, there is a case where a post-depressurization step is not required after the ink dispensing step. If the post-depressurization process is not performed, the manufacturing process can be simplified. However, since the air pressure p1 in the ink storage chamber 111 after the ink is dispensed is not necessarily within the predetermined range, the air pressure p1 in order to obtain the atmospheric pressure within the predetermined range (at the atmospheric pressure within the predetermined range). In order to confirm that this is the case, in this embodiment, a post-depressurization step is performed.

  Here, although not shown, a post-depressurization step performed after the completion of the ink dispensing will be described. The post-depressurization step is performed using the ink dispensing needle 920 inserted into the ink dispensing plug 520. That is, the ink dispensing needle 920 is connected to a supply device (not shown) for supplying ink and a decompression device (not shown) for sucking the atmosphere in the frame portion 110 to reduce the pressure. When the dispensing of is completed, the flow path is switched and decompression by the decompression device is started. The pressure p3 (third pressure) in the ink storage chamber 111 after the post-depressurization is performed is lower than the pressure p1 in the ink storage chamber 111 after the ink is dispensed. Therefore, since the amount of gas in the ink storage chamber 111 is reduced by performing the post-depressurization step, the generation of bubbles in the ink can be further prevented, and the deterioration in printing quality due to the bubbles can be avoided. In addition, the ink flowing during the ink dispensing process collides with the inner surface of the ink storage chamber 111, so that air bubbles are easily generated. However, the air bubbles generated at this time can also be removed. A pressure reducing needle (not shown) for post-depressurization may be provided separately from the ink dispensing needle 920, and after the ink dispensing needle 920 has been pulled out, the pressure reducing needle may be inserted to perform pressure reduction.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 17, the dispensing channel forming portion 450 is located above the ink liquid level I (above FIG. 17A) in the opening position of the second dispensing communication hole 454. Even if the pressure is reduced afterward by the pressure reducing device, the ink is not sucked to the outside through the dispensing path. Therefore, the ink amount once dispensed is not changed by the subsequent decompression, and a predetermined amount of ink can be reliably dispensed.

  Although not shown, when the ink dispensing (or post-depressurization) is finished, the ink dispensing plug 520 is press-fitted until it comes into contact with the bottom 451b (the end surface on the ink storage chamber 111 side) of the dispensing cylinder 451. Therefore, after the ink dispensing plug 520 is press-fitted to the bottom 451b of the dispensing cylinder 451, the first dispensing communication hole 452 is blocked by the outer peripheral surface of the ink dispensing plug 520. Even if the needle is inserted, the ink is not dispensed. That is, in the manufacturing process of the ink cartridge 14, it is possible to prevent the dispensing process from being performed twice and to prevent the generation of defective products.

  As shown in FIG. 38A, when the ink dispensing (or post-depressurization) is completed, the manufacture of the ink reservoir 110 is completed, and then the case 200 is assembled (the assembly process of the case 200). The case 200 (first and second case members 210 and 220) is molded by injection molding and manufactured in advance (third molding step).

  As described above, the cover 200 is assembled to the ink reservoir 110 in the first case in the three through holes 460a to 460c (see FIG. 14 for the through holes 460b and 460c) formed in the outer peripheral portion of the frame portion 100. The bar members 215 a to 215 c of the member 210 are inserted, and the ink reservoir 110 is assembled to the first case member 210. At this time, the ink supply unit 120 (supply cap 600) and the atmosphere introduction unit 130 (atmosphere cap 700) are fitted into the case notches 211 and 212, respectively, and the outer wall of the ink supply unit 120 (at the contact grooves 211a and 212a). The outer peripheral surface of the supply cap 600 and the outer wall of the air introduction part 130 (the outer peripheral surface of the air cap 700) abut. Thereafter, the second case member 220 is attached so that the case fitting holes 225 a to 225 c (not shown) of the second case member 220 are fitted to the rod members 215 a to 215 c of the first case member 210. At this time, the ink supply part 120 (supply cap 600) and the atmosphere introduction part 130 (atmosphere cap 700) are fitted in the case notches 221 and 222 of the second case member 220, respectively, and ink is supplied to the contact grooves 221a and 222a. The outer wall of the portion 120 (the outer peripheral surface of the supply cap 600) and the outer wall of the atmospheric introduction unit 130 (the outer peripheral surface of the atmospheric cap 700) abut.

  As shown in FIG. 38B, when the assembly of the first and second cases 210 and 220 (assembly process) is completed, the first and second case members 210 and 220 are welded together (welding process of the case 200). . The first and second case members 210 and 220 are welded by welding the first case welded portion 216 of the first case member 210 and the first case welded portion 226 of the second case member 220 together with the first case member. The second case welded portion 217 of 210 and the second case welded portion 227 of the second case member 220 are welded (the hatched portion in FIG. 38B is welded). In this embodiment, the case 200 is welded by welding the entire first and second case welded parts 226 and 227, but several parts may be welded partially. That is, as long as the case 200 is not peeled off during conveyance or is welded so as not to be easily peeled off by human action, the welding range and welding method may be any range or method.

  In the present embodiment, the first and second case members 210 and 220 are assembled after the ink is dispensed into the ink reservoir 100, and then the first and second case members 210 and 220 are welded. Vibration caused by sonic welding is absorbed by the ink. Therefore, vibration for welding the case 200 is transmitted, so that the welded part of the frame part 110 and the film 160 are damaged or the film 160 is peeled off. In addition, in the case where the welded portions of the first and second case members 210 and 220 are partially performed, vibrations due to ultrasonic welding are reduced, so that damage to each component and peeling of the film 160 can be further reduced. Can do.

  As shown in FIG. 38B, the case protrusions 214a and 224a (the case protrusion 214a is not shown) and the case protrusions 214b and 224b (the case protrusion 214b are not shown) are inks. Projecting outward from the supply unit 120 and the air introduction unit 130. Therefore, even when the ink cartridge 14 is dropped when the ink cartridge 14 is mounted on the ink jet recording apparatus 1, the case protrusions 214a, 214b, 224a, 224b collide with the ground, so the ink supply unit 120 and the air introduction unit It is possible to prevent 130 from being damaged. Furthermore, since it is possible to prevent the air introduction path from being opened and the ink supply path from being opened, it is possible to prevent ink from leaking out.

  As shown in FIG. 39A, when the welding process of the case 200 is completed, the protector 300 is attached to the case 200 (attachment process of the protector 300). Since the protector 300 is removed when the ink cartridge 14 is attached to the multi-function device 1 (see FIG. 1), the protector 300 is configured to be detachable. As described above, the through holes formed by the case protruding notches 214a and 224a (see FIG. 8) of the first and second case members 210 and 220, and the case protruding notches of the first and second case members 210 and 220, respectively. The projections 330a1 and 330b1 of the protector 300 are fitted into the through holes formed by the portions 214b and 224b, so that the protector 300 is attached to the case 200. In addition, the 2nd protector fitting part 330a, 330b of the protector 300 can perform attachment or detachment of the protector 300 easily by elastically deforming in the direction away from each other.

  As shown in FIG. 39B, when the protector 300 is attached (attachment process), the ink cartridge 14 is accommodated in the packaging bag 930 in order to ship the ink cartridge 14 (accommodation process). Then, the inside of the packaging bag 930 is decompressed by the decompression device 940 (packaging space decompression process of the packaging bag 930). The packaging bag 930 is a bag body in which one end side (the end on the left front side in FIG. 39 (b)) is opened. Ultrasonic weld the part. The suction pipe 941 of the decompression device 940 is inserted through the opening 931 and the suction pump (P2) 942 is driven, so that the atmosphere in the packaging bag 930 is sucked and decompressed. The pressure of the packaging bag 930 due to the reduced pressure is lower than the atmospheric pressure, but is lower than the reduced pressure p3 (or the pressure p1 if the post-depressurization step is not performed) in the ink storage chamber 111 (first pressure). 2). When the decompression by the decompression device 940 is finished, the suction tube 941 is pulled out, the opening 931 is welded, and the ink cartridge 14 can be shipped. The relationship between the atmospheric pressures p1 to p3 is a relationship of p2 <p3 <p1.

  The film 160 of the ink cartridge 14 can be bent and deformed to the packaging bag 930 side (case 200 side) by setting the pressure inside the packaging bag 930 to a pressure lower than the pressure inside the ink storage chamber 111 by the packaging space decompression step. When the air pressure in the packaging bag 930 is higher than the air pressure in the ink storage chamber 111, the film 160 becomes hard and hardened in a state where the ink storage chamber 111 is decompressed when the ink cartridge 14 is left unused for a long period of time. Or may be damaged. If the film 160 hardens, the shape of the ink storage chamber 116 changes and the air pressure becomes non-uniform, so that accurate ink supply cannot be performed. Further, when the film 160 is damaged, the ink in the ink storage chamber 111 flows out of the ink cartridge 14. However, in this embodiment, the pressure in the packaging bag 930 is reduced so that the pressure is lower than the pressure in the ink storage chamber 111, so that the film 160 can be deformed (recoverable) to the packaging bag 930 side. Therefore, even when the film 160 is not used for a long time, it is possible to reduce the problem that the film 160 is hardened and ink cannot be supplied accurately, and the film 160 can be prevented from being damaged.

  Further, by setting the inside of the packaging bag 930 to a pressure lower than the pressure in the ink storage chamber 111, the gas remaining in the ink storage chamber 111 (the remaining gas is slight due to the decompression step after the first implementation) is reduced. The ink storage chamber 111 can be gradually moved outside. As described above, since the film 160 is formed of nylon polyethylene having a small gas barrier property, the air pressure in the space inside the ink storage chamber 111 and the air pressure in the space outside the ink storage chamber 111 in the packaging bag 930 are the same. This is because the gas moves from the inside of the ink storage chamber 111 to the outside in an attempt to transition to an equilibrium state. Therefore, deaeration of the ink stored in the ink storage chamber 111 is promoted, and air bubbles are less likely to be generated. Therefore, it is possible to maintain good print quality.

  Further, in this embodiment, the ink cartridge 14 is packaged in the packaging bag 930 and decompressed with the protector 300 attached to the case 200. Therefore, as the packaging bag 930 is deformed by decompression, the direct air introduction unit 130 ( And no contact with the ink supply unit 120). Since the valve opening part 721a protrudes outside the atmosphere introduction part 130, when the packaging bag 930 directly contacts the valve opening part 721a, the valve opening part 721a may operate to open the atmosphere introduction path. When the air introduction path is opened, ink in the ink storage chamber 111 leaks out. Further, the air introduction unit 130 and the ink supply unit 120 may be damaged as the packaging bag 930 is deformed. However, in this embodiment, since it is attached to the protector 300 and the case 200, it is possible to prevent the atmosphere introduction unit 130 and the ink supply unit 120 from being damaged and to prevent the atmosphere introduction path from being opened.

  As described above, the ink cartridge 14 is manufactured by dispensing ink into the ink storage chamber 111 of the frame portion 110 and then welding the ink storage body 100 with the case 200 covered. Some conventional ink cartridges dispense ink from outside the case after the case is placed on the ink reservoir (after the assembly of the ink cartridge is completed). In this conventional ink cartridge, it is necessary to prepare a frame and a case according to the amount of ink stored and the ink color. However, in this embodiment, since the case 200 is covered after the ink is dispensed into the ink storage chamber 111 of the ink storage body 100, the ink storage body 100 can be made into a common component. That is, even when the case shapes are different, the ink reservoir 100 can be used in common. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the ink cartridge 14 can be reduced.

  In addition, since the ink dispensing unit 150 (ink dispensing plug 520) is not visible from the outside by the case 200 and is completely concealed in the ink cartridge 14, the user accidentally removes the ink dispensing plug 520, It is possible to prevent problems such as scattering ink outside.

  Next, a method for mounting the ink cartridge 14 to the multi-function device 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating a method for mounting the ink cartridge 14 to the multi-function device 1.

  When attaching the ink cartridge 14 to the multi-function device 1, first, the packaging bag 930 is broken, and the ink cartridge 14 is taken out from the packaging bag 930. Then, it is performed with the protector 300 removed from the case 200. The mounting directions of the ink cartridges 14 (for color, black, and large-capacity black) to the multi-function device 1 are the same.

  First, the internal structure of the refill unit 13 of the multi-function device 1 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the refill unit 13 is provided with the needle 49 below the back surface 56 side of the case 40, and the needle 49 follows the mounting direction F of the ink cartridge 14 (arrow F in FIG. 40A). Protruding. This mounting direction F is parallel to the longitudinal direction (arrow B direction, X direction) of the ink cartridge 14 mounted on the refill unit 13 as is apparent from FIG. An ink remaining amount detection sensor 57 is disposed above the needle 49. The ink remaining amount detection sensor 57 is formed in a substantially U shape, and one end portion of the U shape that is opened is a light emitting portion 57a that emits light, and the other end portion receives light. This is a portion 57b (not shown). The light emitting portion 57a and the light receiving portion 57b are attached so as to protrude from the back surface 56 so as to be inserted through the through holes formed by the case cutout portions 213 and 223 and the detection portion 140, respectively. The ink remaining amount detection sensor 57 does not output (or outputs) a signal to the control device provided in the multi-function device 1 when the light receiving unit 57b receives the light emitted from the light emitting unit 57a. When the light emitted from the light emitting unit 57a is blocked and the light receiving unit 57b cannot receive light, the signal is output (or not output) to the control device.

  As shown in FIG. 40A, when the ink cartridge 14 (with the protector 300 removed) is attached to the multi-function device 1, the ink cartridge 14 is placed below the ink supply unit 120 and the air introduction unit 130 is placed below. Install it so that it faces up. This state is the normal mounting posture (or first posture) of the ink cartridge 14.

  In addition, the ink cartridge 14 is mounted in the multi-function device 1 in the order of the ink supply unit 120, the detection unit 140, and the air introduction unit 130 from the bottom to the top. 120, the detection part 140, and the air introduction part 130 are formed in one end surface. As is apparent from FIG. 40B, this one end surface is one side surface of the case 200 that is positioned forward in the mounting direction F when the ink cartridge 14 is in the normal mounting posture. Therefore, since the ink supply 120, the detection unit 140, and the air introduction unit 130 are concentrated on one end surface, the ink remaining amount detection sensor 57, the needle 49, and the passage 54 that are necessary on the multi-function device 1 side are provided on one side. (Back surface 56) can be provided collectively. If the ink supply unit 120 is provided on the lower surface of the ink cartridge 14 and the detection unit 140 and the air introduction unit 130 are provided on the side surface of the ink cartridge 14, the multi-function device 1 side replaces the needle 49 with the refill unit 13. The ink remaining amount detection sensor 57 and the passage 54 must be provided on the side surface (rear surface 56) side of the case 40, and these are dispersed to increase the size of the multi-function device 1. However, since these are integrated in the present embodiment, the multi-function device 1 can be reduced in size.

  Further, on one end face, the ink supply unit 120 and the detection unit 140 are provided in this order from the bottom to the top, and a method using the sensor arm 470 is adopted as a method for detecting the remaining amount of ink. As a result, the ink can be used up. This is due to the following reason.

  When the remaining amount of ink is detected by irradiating a part of the ink cartridge (corresponding to the detection unit 140 in this embodiment) using a photodetector (corresponding to the ink remaining amount detection sensor 57 in this embodiment), the ink is temporarily assumed. If a method of directly detecting the presence or absence of ink (method of detecting the remaining amount of ink based on whether or not ink is present in the optical path of the light detector) is used, as in this embodiment, an ink supply port ( In the configuration in which both the ink supply unit 120 in the present embodiment) and the irradiated portion (detection unit 140) irradiated by the photodetector are provided, it is not possible to improve the use of ink. In other words, in the configuration in which the irradiated portion is arranged below the ink supply port, the position of the ink supply port becomes relatively high, so that the ink stored below the ink supply port is used up, resulting in consumption efficiency. In the configuration in which the irradiated portion is disposed above the ink supply port, the position of the irradiated portion becomes relatively high. Therefore, when the photodetector detects no ink, a considerable amount of ink is still present. Therefore, if the user is informed of the absence of ink based on the detection result of the photodetector, the remaining amount of ink increases. However, in this embodiment, by using the sensor arm 470, even when the irradiated portion is provided at a relatively high position, the absence of ink is detected at the timing when the actual remaining ink amount is low. In addition, since the ink supply port is provided at a low position, the remaining amount of ink is reduced.

  Note that the ink cartridge has a configuration in which the ink supply port is provided on the lower surface of the ink cartridge and the irradiated portion is provided on the side surface of the ink cartridge, even if the ink is directly detected. Use up of will not worsen. However, in this case, as described above, there is another problem that the multifunction device 1 is enlarged. That is, only in the invention of this embodiment, both the downsizing of the multi-function device 1 and the improvement of the use up of ink can be realized.

  As shown in FIG. 40A, the ink cartridge 14 is mounted by inserting the case protrusions 214a and 224a (first case welded portions 216 and 226) of the case 200 so as to slide on the upper surface of the door body 60, This is performed by pushing the back surface of the ink cartridge 14 in the mounting direction F until most of the ink cartridge 14 is inserted into the refill unit 13. As described above, since the inclined surfaces 214a2 and 224a2 are formed on the case protrusions 214a and 224a, the ink cartridge 14 can be smoothly inserted by the inclined surfaces 214a2 and 224a2.

  As shown in FIG. 40B, when the ink cartridge 14 is pushed into the refill unit 13 in the mounting direction F, the protrusion 55 is inserted into the groove formed by the case protrusion grooves 214b2 and 224b2. Yes. Further, the tip of the needle 49 is located in the supply cap 600 of the ink supply unit 120. The movement of the ink cartridge 14 in the left-right direction (the direction from the front side to the heel side in FIG. 40B) is restricted by the protrusion 55 and the case protrusion grooves 214b2 and 224b2, and the bottom plate portion 42 and the top plate portion of the refill unit 13 are controlled. Since the movement in the vertical direction is restricted by 44, it is possible to prevent the ink cartridge 14 from being inserted obliquely and the remaining ink detection sensor 57 and the needle 49 from being damaged. Further, by providing the protrusion 55, the ink cartridge 14 can be mounted while being guided to the regular mounting position.

  When the door member 60 is rotated in the direction of the arrow shown in FIG. 40B from the state of FIG. 40B, the press holding member 61 of the door member 60 comes into contact with the back surface of the ink cartridge 14, and the ink cartridge 14 is mounted. It is pressed in the direction F. When the door member 60 is further rotated in the direction of the arrow, the door lock member 62 of the door member 60 is fitted into the lock member fitting portion 46 of the refill unit 13 and the mounting of the ink cartridge 14 is completed (FIG. 40 ( c)). Although illustration and description are omitted, when the state shown in FIG. 40C is reached, the tip of the swing arm mechanism 44b is fitted in the locking portions 217a and 227a to hold the ink cartridge 14.

  When the mounting of the ink cartridge 14 is completed, the needle 49 is inserted into the ink supply unit 120 so that the ink can be supplied. The ink remaining amount detection sensor 57 is inserted into the through hole formed by the case notches 213 and 223 and the detection unit 140, and the ink remaining amount can be detected. Will be described later.

  Further, when the ink cartridge 14 is mounted in the refill unit 13, the ink remaining amount detection sensor 57 is inserted into the through hole formed by the case notches 213 and 223 and the detection unit 140. The light emitting part 57 a and the light receiving part 57 b of the detection sensor 57 are located in the case 200. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ink remaining amount detection sensor 57 from being damaged, and it is possible to prevent dust or dust from adhering to the light emitting portion 57a and the light receiving portion 57b and causing erroneous detection.

  Further, as described above, since the press holding member 61 is biased by the coil spring 66, the ink cartridge 14 can be stably held. When the ink cartridge 14 is attached to the refill unit 13 (or when it is attached), the elastic force of each spring member 630, 650, 730, 750 of the ink supply mechanism 500 and the air introduction mechanism 510 is changed to the needle 49. Acts in a direction away from the side surface on which the is disposed (left direction in FIG. 40, anti-mounting direction). As described above, the pressing and holding member 61 is configured to have an elastic force larger than the elastic force generated by the spring members 630, 650, 730, and 750, so that the ink cartridge 14 is once mounted. , Can be held stably. Furthermore, since the press holding member 61 presses slightly below a substantially intermediate position between the ink supply unit 120 and the atmosphere introduction unit 130, an elastic force that is substantially equal to the ink supply unit 120 and the atmosphere introduction unit 130. Can act. Therefore, the ink cartridge 14 can be stably mounted in the refill unit 13.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 41, the operation of the ink supply mechanism 500 and the air introduction mechanism 510 when the ink cartridge 14 is mounted in the multi-function device 1 will be described. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a state where the ink cartridge 14 is attached to the multi-function device 1. 41 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the ink supply mechanism 500 and the air introduction mechanism 510, the case 200, the protrusion 55 of the multi-function device 1 and the like are omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 41, when the ink cartridge 14 is attached to the multi-function device 1 (within the refill unit 13), the light emitting portion 57a and the light receiving portion 57b (not shown) of the ink remaining amount detecting sensor 57 are detected by the detecting portion 140. It is arrange | positioned in the position which pinches | interposes. Since the detection unit 140 is made of a translucent or transparent resin material, the light emitted from the light emitting unit 57a of the ink remaining amount detection sensor 57 passes through the detection unit 140, and the light receiving unit 57b receives the light. be able to. As described above, since the shielding arm portion 473c of the sensor arm 470 is disposed in the inner packet portion 141 of the detection unit 140, the remaining amount of ink can be detected by the operation of the sensor arm 470. The operation of the sensor arm 470 will be described later.

  When the ink cartridge 14 is attached to the multi-function device 1, the ink supply mechanism 500 includes the space surrounded by the inclined wall 606 d of the supply cap 600, the insertion hole 605 of the supply cap 600, and the ink flow path 615 of the supply joint 600. The needles 49 are inserted in order, and the tip of the needle 49 comes into contact with the valve bottom wall 621 of the supply valve 620 to push the supply valve 620. As a result, the supply valve 620 is separated from the joint contact portion 613 of the supply joint 610 to form an ink flow path. The needle 49 communicates with an ejection port (not shown) of the multi-function device 1 through the ink extraction port 52 and the ink tube 53. Further, a notch 49a for securing an ink flow path is formed at the tip of the needle 49, and even if the tip of the needle 49 contacts the valve bottom wall 621 of the supply valve 620, the ink flow is prevented by the notch 49a. A road is secured.

  Here, the operation of the ink supply mechanism 500 when the supply valve 620 is pushed by the needle 49 will be described. As described above, the first flexible spring 630 housed in the supply valve 620 (and the supply slider 640) has the spring flexible portion 633 slightly bent. On the other hand, the spring flexible portion 653 of the second supply spring 650 disposed on the opposite side of the supply slider 640 from the first supply spring 630 is not bent. This is to determine the order in which the first and second supply springs 630 and 650 are bent. That is, since the first supply spring 630 in which the spring flexible portion 633 is bent is easier to bend than the second supply spring 650, when the needle 49 is inserted, the first supply spring 630 is bent first, and thereafter The second supply spring 650 is bent.

  Here, the height of the ink supply mechanism 500 in the direction of the axial center O1 has a dimensional error during production for each part. Therefore, the dimensional error tends to occur as the number of parts increases. However, since the supply slider 640 is in contact with the valve hook portion 626 of the valve member 610, at least the dimensional error of the first supply spring 630 is irrelevant. Therefore, the dimensional error of the ink supply mechanism 500 is reduced, and the expansion / contraction operation of the ink supply mechanism 500 is stabilized.

  Further, the inner diameter of the valve outer peripheral wall 622 of the supply valve 620 and the outer diameter of the slider outer peripheral wall 641 of the supply slider 640 are formed substantially equal. Therefore, when the supply slider 640 operates in the direction of the axis O1 of the ink supply mechanism 500, it is possible to prevent the shift in the movement direction. Further, the inner diameter of the slider outer peripheral wall 641 and the outer diameters of the spring bottoms 631 and 651 of the first and second supply springs 630 and 650 are formed to be substantially equal. Therefore, when the first and second spring members 630 and 650 are disposed on the slider pedestal 644 of the supply slider 640, the displacement of the first and second spring members 630 and 650 in the direction perpendicular to the axis O1 (the vertical direction in FIG. 41) is reduced. Can do. Further, the outer shape of the outer peripheral wall 622 of the supply valve 620 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the ink supply body 116, but a valve protrusion 622 a is formed outward from the outer peripheral wall 622 of the supply valve 620. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a shift in the moving direction when the supply valve 620 operates in the direction of the axis O1. Accordingly, the expansion / contraction operation of the ink supply mechanism 500 in the direction of the axis O1 is stabilized.

  When the valve bottom wall 621 of the supply valve 620 is pushed by the needle 49 and moves in the direction of the valve seat 660 (right side in FIG. 41), the first supply spring 630 is flexibly compressed so as to move. When the needle 49 is further deformed and the needle 49 is inserted, the supply valve 620 moves in the direction of the valve seat 660, and accordingly, the supply slider 640 moves in the direction of the valve seat 660 (attachment of the first supply spring 630 and the second supply spring 650). The second supply spring 650 is flexibly deformed. This state is the state shown in FIG.

  When the ink cartridge 14 is attached to the case 40 of the multi-function device 1, the first and second supply springs 630 and 650 are also elastically deformed to form the ink flow path K indicated by the arrow K. The ink flow path K includes an ink storage chamber 111 (see FIG. 14), a second supply communication hole 423, a first supply communication hole 421, a first cover through hole 683 (and second cover through hole 684) of the cover 680, a valve. The first valve seat through hole 662b and the second valve seat through hole 663 of the seat 660, the valve seat communication groove 664 of the valve seat 660, the ink flow path 654 of the second supply spring 650, the slider through hole 645 of the supply slider 640, the first 1 an ink flow path 634 of the supply spring member 630, a flow path formed between the first spring member 930 and the valve receiving portion 628, an ink flow path 627 of the supply valve 620, a notch 49a of the needle 49, and the inside of the needle 49 It is a channel which goes through in order. This channel is the main channel through which most of the ink flows. The space between the valve outer peripheral wall 622 of the supply valve 620 and the inner peripheral surface of the ink supply body 116 also becomes an ink flow path.

  Here, the operation of the supply joint 610 when the needle 49 is inserted into the supply joint 610 will be described. When the needle 49 is press-fitted into the protruding portion flow path 615b through the stepped portion flow path 615a, the joint protruding portion 614 is dragged by the needle 49 due to friction between the inner peripheral surface 614a and the outer peripheral surface of the needle 49. 49 is displaced in the insertion direction (right side in FIG. 41) (displaced in the contact portion flow path 615c). At this time, since the joint contact portion 613 has a structure that is notched in a countersink shape, the displacement of the joint projection portion 614 in the insertion direction of the needle 49 is directly applied to the tip 613a of the joint contact portion 613. Is not transmitted. That is, the tip 613 a of the joint contact portion 613 is hardly displaced in the insertion direction, and the tip 613 a of the joint contact portion 613 is slightly displaced in the direction away from the needle 49. Therefore, the shape change of the supply joint 610 accompanying the insertion of the needle 49 is a shape change that displaces the joint abutting portions 613 in directions away from each other. If the joint contact portion 613 has a shape having a gentle slope from the inner peripheral surface 614a of the joint protrusion portion 614 toward the tip 613a of the joint contact portion 613, the joint protrusion 613 is inserted as the needle 49 is inserted. The portion 614 is deformed so as to be displaced in the insertion direction of the needle 49, and the deformation of the joint projection 614 is directly transmitted to the joint contact portion 613, and the joint contact portion 613 is displaced in the insertion direction together with the joint projection 614. End up. As a result, the insertion stroke of the needle 49 for forming the ink flow path between the supply valve 620 and the joint abutting portion 613 becomes long, so the needle 49 must be formed long. Moreover, when the needle 49 becomes longer, the needle 49 comes into contact with other members and is easily damaged, and the length of the ink supply mechanism 500 in the direction of the axis O1 becomes longer and becomes larger. However, in this embodiment, the joint contact portion 613 is displaced in a direction substantially perpendicular to the insertion direction of the needle 49, so that it is not necessary to lengthen the stroke for forming the ink flow path. Therefore, the contact of the needle 49 with other members can be reduced to reduce breakage, and the increase in scale of the ink supply mechanism 500 can be reduced.

  When the ink cartridge 14 is detached from the multi-function device 1, the valve bottom wall 621 of the supply valve 620 comes into contact with the joint contact portion 613 of the supply joint 610 as the needle 49 is removed. K is blocked. At this time, the second supply spring 650 is fully extended, and the first supply spring 630 is returned to a slightly deformed state. When the ink cartridge 14 is detached from the multi-function device 1, the ink in the vicinity of the ink flow path 615 (the contact flow path 615 c and the protrusion flow path 615 b) of the supply joint 610 as the needle 49 is pulled out. Flows in the direction of the supply cap 600 (left side in FIG. 41) and flows out to the staircase portion flow path 615a. However, since a small amount of ink flows out to the staircase channel 615a, the ink can be held by the capillary force of the staircase portion of the staircase channel 615a, and the outflow to the outside of the ink cartridge 14 can be reduced. Furthermore, even if the ink flows out of the staircase channel 615a, the ink storage portion 602 of the supply cap 600 has an opening wider than the opening 612c of the staircase channel 615a. Flows into the portion 607. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent ink from flowing out of the ink cartridge 14.

  Next, the atmosphere introduction mechanism 510 side will be described. When the ink cartridge 14 is attached to the multi-function device 1, the air introduction mechanism 510 is configured such that the valve opening portion 721 a of the air valve 720 exposed to the outside from the air cap 700 contacts the back surface 56 of the case 40, and the air valve 720 is moved. Push. As a result, the atmospheric valve 720 is separated from the joint contact portion 713 of the atmospheric joint 710, and the atmospheric introduction path L indicated by the arrow L shown in the drawing is formed. Further, when the valve opening portion 721a of the atmospheric valve 720 is pressed against the back surface 56, the joint skirt portion 714 of the atmospheric joint 710 contacts the back surface 56, and the joint skirt portion 714 expands (or contracts). Deforms and deforms. As a result, it is in close contact with the back surface 56 and shields the outside and inside of the joint skirt portion 714. A passage 54 serving as a passage for introducing the atmosphere is formed on the back surface 56 that is inside the joint skirt portion 714, and the atmosphere is introduced into the ink storage chamber 111 through the passage 54.

  The operation of the atmospheric introduction mechanism 510 when the atmospheric valve 720 is pushed will be described. As described above, in the first atmospheric spring 730 housed in the atmospheric valve 720 (and the atmospheric slider 740), the spring flexible portion 733 is slightly bent, while the spring flexible portion 753 of the second atmospheric spring 750 is bent. There is no deflection. Therefore, the order in which the first and second atmospheric springs 730 and 750 are bent is also determined.

  Further, the inner diameter of the valve outer peripheral wall 722 of the atmospheric valve 720 and the outer diameter of the slider outer peripheral wall 741 of the atmospheric slider 740 are formed substantially equal. Therefore, when the air slider 740 moves in the direction of the axis O2 of the air introduction mechanism 510, it is possible to prevent the movement direction from being shifted. Further, the inner diameter of the slider outer peripheral wall 741 and the outer diameters of the spring bottom portions 731 and 751 of the first and second atmospheric spring members 730 and 750 are formed to be substantially equal. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first and second atmospheric springs 730 and 750 from being displaced in a direction (vertical direction in FIG. 41) perpendicular to the axis O2 in a state where the first and second atmospheric springs 730 and 750 are disposed on the slider base portion 744 of the atmospheric slider 740. Can do. The outer shape of the outer peripheral wall 722 of the atmospheric valve 720 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the atmospheric introduction body 117, but a valve protrusion 722a is formed outward from the outer peripheral wall 722 of the atmospheric valve 720. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a shift in the moving direction when the atmospheric valve 720 operates in the direction of the axis O2. Accordingly, the expansion and contraction operation of the atmosphere introduction climate 510 in the direction of the axis O2 is stabilized.

  Further, when the atmospheric valve 720 is pushed by the valve opening portion 721a and moves in the direction of the protruding portion 811 (rightward in FIG. 41), the first atmospheric spring 730 is flexibly deformed so as to be compressed along with this movement, Furthermore, when the atmospheric valve 720 is pushed, the atmospheric slider 740 moves in the direction of the protrusion 811 and the second atmospheric spring 750 is flexibly deformed. This state is the state shown in FIG.

  When the ink cartridge 14 is attached to the case 40 of the multi-function device 1, the first and second atmospheric springs 730 and 750 are also elastically deformed to form the atmospheric introduction path L indicated by the arrow L. The atmosphere introduction path L includes a joint passage 715 of the atmosphere joint 710, an ink flow path 727 of the atmosphere valve 720, a flow path formed between the first atmosphere spring 730 and the valve receiver 728, and ink of the first atmosphere spring 730. A flow path 734, a slider through-hole 745 of the atmospheric slider 740, an ink flow path 754 of the second atmospheric spring 750, a flow path formed between the spring upper portion 752 of the second atmospheric spring 750 and the protrusion 811, the first atmosphere The flow path passes through the communication holes 434 in order. This channel is the main channel through which most of the air flows. Further, the space between the outer peripheral wall 722 of the atmospheric valve 720 and the inner peripheral surface 810 of the atmospheric introduction body 117 also serves as an atmospheric introduction path. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 16, the first atmosphere communication chamber 431, the communication port 433a, the atmosphere connection path 433, the communication port 433b, the second atmosphere communication chamber 432, the second atmosphere communication hole 435, and the third atmosphere communication hole 436. The air is introduced into the ink storage chamber 111. When the atmosphere introduction path L is opened, the atmosphere is introduced so that the inside of the ink storage chamber 111 is at atmospheric pressure.

  As described above, the ink flow path K and the air introduction path L are formed when the ink cartridge 14 is attached to the multi-function device 1. The ink supply mechanism 500 and the air introduction mechanism 510 operate smoothly and without deviation with respect to the axial centers O1 and O2. Therefore, it is possible to reliably supply the ink and introduce the air while facilitating the mounting of the ink cartridge 14.

  Next, a method for detecting the remaining amount of ink in the ink storage chamber 111 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 42 is a diagram illustrating the operation of the sensor arm 470 corresponding to the ink remaining amount in the ink storage chamber 111, and FIG. ) Indicates a state where there is no remaining ink (ink empty). FIG. 43 is a diagram schematically showing the operation principle of the sensor arm 470. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 42A, a state where a large amount of ink is stored in the ink storage chamber 111 (a state where a large amount of ink is stored at least from the lower end of the inner circumference welded portions 415a, 415b, 416a, 416b). Then, since the balance portion 471 of the sensor arm 470 is formed of a resin material having a specific gravity smaller than the specific gravity of the ink, the buoyancy generated in the balance portion 471 is increased, and the balance portion 471 is floating in the ink. As shown in FIG. 42 (a), when the balance portion 471 is in the ink, the counterclockwise direction as a whole by the combined force of gravity and buoyancy generated in the balance portion 471 and gravity and buoyancy generated in the shielding arm portion 473c. Although the rotating force in the direction of arrow G1 in FIG. 43 is received, the shielding arm portion 473c contacts the arm support portion 143 provided upright from the bottom wall 141a of the detection portion 140 (inclusive portion 141). It is arranged at a position where the optical path between the light emitting part 57a and the light receiving part 57b of the quantity detection sensor 57 is blocked. This state is a state with ink, and the control device (not shown) of the multi-function device 1 determines whether there is ink.

  When the ink in the ink storage chamber 111 decreases through the ink flow path K, the ink liquid level I decreases as the ink decreases. When the ink level I drops, the shielding arm portion 473c appears on the ink level I, and then the balance portion 471 also appears on the ink level I. When the balance portion 471 appears on the ink liquid level I, the balance portion 471 is heavier than the shielding arm portion 473c, and therefore, the buoyancy generated counterclockwise (in the direction of arrow G1 in FIG. 43) generated in the balance portion 471. , The gravity in the clockwise direction (the direction of arrow G2 in FIG. 43) is balanced, and the resultant force is balanced as a whole. Thereafter, as the ink level I further decreases, the balance portion 471 moves downward following the level I, so that the sensor arm 470 rotates in the clockwise direction. With this turning operation, the shielding arm portion 473c moves away from the arm support portion 143 and moves upward to a position where the light path between the light emitting portion 57a and the light receiving portion 57b of the ink remaining amount detecting sensor 57 is passed. This state is a state of no ink, and the control device (not shown) of the multi-function device 1 determines that there is no ink.

  In the above description, as shown in FIG. 42A and FIG. 42B, the balance unit 471 operates from the time when the ink remaining amount is high to the state where there is no ink remaining amount. In the state where there is no ink remaining, the ink storage chamber 111 is positioned in the vicinity of the bottom 400b1 (see FIG. 15). Therefore, when the ink in the ink storage chamber 111 is low, it is correctly determined that there is no ink.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (b), some ink remains in the ink storage chamber 111 even when there is no ink. At this time, the ink surface I is a position slightly higher than the portion 400 b 1 which is the bottom of the ink storage chamber 111. As described above, the ink storage chamber 111 and the ink supply unit 120 communicate with each other via the ink supply chamber 426 (see FIG. 15) defined by the supply partition 422, and the ink storage chamber 111 and the ink supply are communicated. The chamber 426 communicates with a second supply communication hole 423 located below the bottom 400b1 provided in the supply partition 422. When the ink level I is lower than the second supply communication hole 423, the supply partition 422 is provided. The atmosphere enters the inside of the printer and ink cannot be supplied. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to detect ink empty immediately before ink supply cannot be performed, the sensor arm 470 rotates when the ink liquid level I is above the second supply communication hole 423, and there is no ink. Is to be detected. As described above, the second supply communication hole 423 is positioned below the portion 400b1 serving as the bottom of the ink storage chamber 111, so that it is reliably avoided that the ink runs out before the ink empty is detected. Further, when it is determined that there is no ink, there is almost no ink on the bottom 400b1 of the ink storage chamber 111, and a recessed space that is a relatively narrow space formed at a position lower than the bottom 400b1 in the ink storage chamber 111. Since only the ink remains in 424a, the amount of ink left unused when it is determined that there is no ink is very small and wasteful.

  When it is determined that there is no ink, an ink-free lamp is turned on or a voice is used to inform the user that there is no ink in order to suggest that the user is out of ink. Note that a counter provided in the control device may be used to store the number of times ink has been ejected, and a soft counter that virtually determines the absence of ink may be used in combination to detect the remaining amount of ink.

  42 (a) and 42 (b), the mounting position of the mounting shaft 472a of the sensor arm 470 and the arm clamping unit 425 of the frame 110, that is, the center (pivot) where the sensor arm 470 rotates. The support portion is disposed below the detection unit 140 and above the ink supply unit 120, and rearward from the supply path formation unit 420 in the mounting direction of the ink cartridge 14 (FIGS. 42A and 42B). ) Located on the left side). In this embodiment, the ink supply unit 120, the air introduction unit 130, and the detection unit 140 are collectively arranged on one side surface of the ink cartridge 14. This is because each mechanism (ink supply mechanism, air introduction mechanism, ink remaining amount detection mechanism) is centrally arranged in the refill unit 13 of the multi-function device 1 to prevent the refill unit 13 from having a complicated shape. This is for the purpose of making it easier. Further, since the ink supply unit 120 is a portion that supplies ink to the multi-function device 1 and supplies it, it is preferably provided on the lower end side of the ink cartridge 14 in order to use up the ink well. Is preferably provided on the upper end side of the ink cartridge 14. Therefore, it is preferable in terms of space efficiency that the detection unit 140 is disposed between the ink supply unit 120 and the air introduction unit 130. In such an ink cartridge 14 of this embodiment, when the rotation center position of the sensor arm 470 is disposed above (or at the same position) from the detection unit 140, the length between the balance unit 471 and the mounting unit 472 is as follows. By increasing the length, the sensor arm 470 increases in size, and the amount of ink that can be stored decreases accordingly. On the other hand, when the rotation center position of the sensor arm 470 is disposed below the ink supply unit 120, the movable range of the balance unit 471 becomes extremely small, and it becomes difficult to detect ink empty. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the rotation center position of the sensor arm 470 (the “pivot support portion formed by the attachment portion 472)” is disposed above the ink supply portion 120 and below the detection portion 140. As a result, as described above, the ink empty is reliably detected, and a decrease in the ink storage amount due to the increase in the size of the sensor arm 470 is avoided.

  Further, in the ink cartridge 14 of the present embodiment, when the balance unit 471 is disposed in the vicinity of the supply partition wall 422, the balance unit 471 is close to the second supply communication hole 423, and vibrations that operate the balance unit 471 are transmitted to the ink. This will hinder the flow of ink. In particular, if the ink level I undulates, the air may enter the supply partition 422 from the second supply communication hole 423, which hinders ink supply. On the other hand, if the balance part 471 is extremely separated from the supply partition wall 422, the arm part 473 becomes large, so that the balance part 471 is also enlarged in order to secure the buoyancy of the balance part 471. As a result, the amount of ink stored in the ink storage chamber 111 is reduced. Therefore, in this embodiment, the rotation center position of the sensor arm 470 is set in the vicinity of the supply partition 422, and the balance portion 471 is positioned at the intermediate position of the ink storage chamber 111 in the Y direction. Avoids adverse effects on size and ink flow.

  As shown in FIG. 42A, in the state where the sensor arm 470 is attached to the arm holding portion 425 and the ink is present, the upper end surface (upper end surface in FIG. 42) of the shielding arm portion 473c is the ink liquid. It is located approximately parallel to the surface. In this state, when the liquid level of the ink falls and becomes the same position as the upper end face of the shielding arm 473c, a force for holding the shielding arm 473c is applied by the surface tension of the ink. If the surface tension of the ink holds the shielding arm 473c more than the buoyancy of the balance portion 473a, the sensor arm 470 will not operate normally. Therefore, in this embodiment, the upper end surface of the shielding arm 473c outside the detection unit 140 is provided with an angle so as to be inclined downward, and the portion of the shielding arm 473c that is substantially parallel to the ink surface is reduced. . Therefore, the force that the surface tension of the ink acts on the shielding arm 473c can be reduced, and the sensor arm 470 can be operated normally.

  Here, the case where the ink cartridge 14 is mounted in an incorrect posture will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view showing a state when the ink cartridge 14 is mounted on the multi-function device 1 in an incorrect posture.

  As shown in FIG. 44, when the ink cartridge 14 is inserted into the case 40, the tip of the case protrusions 214a, 224a is the tip of the protrusion 55 when the ink cartridge 14 is mounted upside down with respect to the normal mounting posture. Clash with. Note that the state in which the upper and lower sides are mounted opposite to the normal mounting posture is a state in which the ink supply unit 120 is located at the upper portion and the air introduction unit 130 is located at the lower portion. Or a 2nd attitude | position).

  As shown in FIG. 44, the protrusion distance of the protrusion 55 from the back surface 56 of the case 40 and the protrusion distance of the case protrusions 214a and 224a from the case 200 with respect to the protrusion distance t8 of the needle 49 from the needle forming member 48. The total protrusion distance t9 is longer. By providing a difference between the protruding distance t8 and the protruding distance t9, the tip of the valve opening portion 721a protruding outward from the atmosphere introduction portion 130 and the tip of the needle 49 are not in contact with each other. The needle 49 is a member for extracting the ink in the ink cartridge 14 and supplying the ink to an ink jet recording head (not shown). Therefore, if the needle 49 is damaged or deformed, the ink is not supplied accurately. In some cases, printing may not be performed accurately. Therefore, it is not preferable that the needle 49 and the valve opening portion 721a collide and the needle 49 is damaged or deformed. However, as described above, by providing a difference between the protrusion distance t8 and the protrusion distance t9, the needle 49 can be prevented from colliding with the valve opening portion 721a. Can be reliably supplied.

  Further, since the position in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 44) of the through hole (detection window) formed by the detected portion 140 and the case notches 213 and 223 is slightly shifted from the center, the ink cartridge 14 is If it is mounted upside down with respect to the mounting posture, the ink remaining amount detection sensor 57 may collide with the outer wall of the case 200, and the ink remaining amount detection sensor 57 may be damaged. However, since there is a difference between the protrusion distance t8 and the protrusion distance t9, the ink remaining amount detection sensor 57 can be prevented from colliding with the outer wall of the case 200 and being damaged, and the ink remaining amount can be accurately determined. Can be detected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, a method of detaching from the state where the ink cartridge 14 is mounted on the multi-function device 1 will be described. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a method for detaching the ink cartridge 14 from the multi-function device 1.

  As shown in FIG. 45A, when the ink cartridge 14 is detached from the multi-function device 1 (refill unit 13), the lock release lever 63 of the door 41 is moved to the front side (FIG. 45A left direction). (Turns in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 45 (a)). As described above, when the lock release lever 63 is rotated, the engagement state between the door lock member 62 and the lock member fitting portion 46 is released, and as a result, the door 41 can be rotated forward. .

  Part of the bent portion 65b of the drawer member 65 of the door 41 is disposed in the recesses 216a and 226a of the case 200 (not shown because the recess 226a is on the side of FIG. 45 (a)). When the lever 63 is held and rotated, the leading end of the bent portion 65b of the drawer member 65 of the door 41 becomes the locking portions 216b and 226b of the case 200 (the locking portion 226b is on the side of FIG. 45 (b)). (A state shown in FIG. 45B). Furthermore, when the door 41 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 45B toward the front side (in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 45B), the locking portions 216b and 226b of the case 200 are pulled out by the bent portion 65b of the drawing member 65. As a result, a part of the ink cartridge 14 protrudes from the case 40 (the state shown in FIG. 45C). In this state, the user can easily take out the ink cartridge 14. Therefore, the workability of replacing the ink cartridge 14 is improved.

  Here, a mechanism for preventing ink dripping when the ink cartridge 14 is detached from the multi-function device 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a state in which the ink cartridge 14 is detached from the multi-function device 1 and a front view of the ink cartridge 14. FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b) show the ink cartridge 14 being detached. FIG. 46C is a diagram showing a front view of the ink cartridge 14.

  As described above, the needle 49 is inserted into the ink supply unit 120 in a state where the ink cartridge 14 is mounted on the multi-function device 1. Since the ink supply mechanism 500 is a valve mechanism biased by the first supply spring 630 and the second supply spring 650, the ink cartridge 14 is removed from the multi-function device 1 (from the state shown in FIG. 46A). 46 (b)), the ink may adhere to the protruding tip of the needle 49, or in the worst case, the ink may flow out from the ink supply unit 120. This is because when the needle 49 is removed from the supply joint 610, the supply valve 620 moves in a direction to contact the joint contact portion 613 by the urging force of the first supply spring 630 and the second supply spring 650. Since the ink tends to be pushed out in the direction of flowing out from the protruding portion flow path 615 b toward the staircase portion flow path 615 a, the ink is further gathered on the protruding tip of the needle 49, or outside the ink supply section 120. It can happen that it flows out. For this reason, when the ink cartridge 14 is detached, the ink attached to the tip of the needle 49 drips as an ink droplet or the ink drips from the ink supply unit 120.

  However, as shown in FIG. 46B, in this embodiment, the protrusions (first protrusions) made up of the case protrusions 214a and 224a are outward from the protrusion tip of the ink supply part 120 (right of FIG. 46B). Therefore, even if the ink adhering to the tip of the needle 49 drips as an ink drop or the ink drips from the ink supply unit 120, the dripped ink is transferred to the case protrusions 214 a and 224 a. It can be adhered to the surface of the ink supply unit 120 side. In addition, since the case protrusions 214a and 224a and the ink supply unit 120 are located relatively close to each other, the ink dripping from the ink supply unit 120 is easily attached to the case protrusions 214a and 224a.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (c), the insertion hole 605 of the supply cap 600 is an ink supply port through which the needle 49 is inserted and the ink flows out. The case protrudes from the diameter t 10 of the insertion hole 605. The thickness t11 of the portions 214a and 224a in the width direction of the ink cartridge 14 (FIG. 46C, left-right direction, Z direction) is longer. (The diameter of the needle 49 is slightly smaller than the diameter t10 of the insertion hole 605.) Further, when viewed vertically (when viewed from the Y direction), the insertion holes 605 are occupied by the case protrusions 214a and 224a. All within the area. Therefore, when the ink cartridge 14 is attached or detached, even if the ink adhering to the tip of the needle 49 drips or the ink drips from the insertion hole 605, the dripping ink is caught by the case protrusions 214a and 224a. can do. Further, the case protrusions 214a and 224a protrude in the horizontal direction (FIGS. 46A and 46B in the left-right direction) in the mounting posture of the ink cartridge 14, and the surface on the ink supply unit 120 side is substantially flat. Since it is formed, it is possible to prevent the ink adhering to the case protrusions 214a and 224a from dripping further downward. As a result, it is possible to prevent ink from dripping into the refill unit 13 and becoming dirty. If the inside of the refill unit 13 becomes dirty, the cartridge 14 may become dirty when the ink cartridge 14 is attached / detached, which may cause the user's hand to become dirty. However, since it is possible to prevent the ink from adhering to the refill unit 13 as much as possible, such a problem can be avoided.

  Although the above-described configuration is desirable for preventing contamination, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 14C, the case protrusions 214a and 224a are arranged in the vertical direction of the ink cartridge 14 (FIG. 46). (C) in the vertical direction) at least partly located on a straight line passing through the center of the communication hole 605 (the straight line p in FIG. 14C and also a straight line passing through the center of the opening 600a of the supply cap 600) If it is good. This is because most of the ink dripping from the ink supply unit 120 and the needle 49 can take a dropping path along the straight line p. Therefore, with this configuration, even if the length of the case protrusions 214a and 224a in the width direction of the ink cartridge 14 is shorter than the length t10 of the insertion hole 605 in the width direction, it contributes to preventing the refill unit 13 from being stained. can do. In this case, since the ink holding force by the case protrusions 214a and 224a is weakened, it is assumed that the ink once caught by the case protrusions 214a and 224a drips into the refill unit 13. However, the ink cartridge 14 to be replaced is rarely left in the refill unit 13 for a long time with the tip of the needle 49 removed from the ink supply unit 120, and is quickly removed from the refill unit 13. Defects are unlikely to occur. Incidentally, even if the case protrusions 214a and 224a are formed thin, when the ink cartridge 14 is mounted in a wrong posture, it collides with the tip of the projection 55, so that erroneous mounting can be prevented. . Furthermore, even if the case protrusions 214a and 224a are not exactly located on the straight line p, if the ink is located vertically below the ink supply unit 120, the ink dripping from the ink supply unit 120 is somewhat caught. Therefore, dirt in the refill unit 13 can be prevented as compared with the case where the case protrusions 214a and 224a are not provided.

  Next, referring to FIG. 47, a structure for reducing the adhesion of ink to the detection surfaces 140a and 140b of the detection unit 140 of the ink cartridge 14 will be described. FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining a structure for reducing the adhesion of ink to the detection surfaces 140a and 140b of the detection unit 140 of the ink cartridge 14, and FIG. FIG. 47B is a diagram showing a surface on which the detection unit 140 of the ink cartridge 14 is formed, and FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a cartridge 14. FIG. In addition, since the ink cartridge 14 of FIG. 47A is a diagram for illustrating the positional relationship between the outer shape and the detection unit 140, the detailed structure is not illustrated and is schematically illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 47A, when the ink cartridge 14 is detached from the refill unit 13, ink may be scattered from the protruding tip of the ink supply unit 120 or the protruding tip of the needle 49. This is because the ink supply mechanism 500 of the ink supply unit 120 opens and closes due to the elastic force of the first and second supply springs 630 and 650, so that the ink pressure rapidly changes when the ink cartridge 14 is attached or detached. When the ink stored in the ink supply mechanism 500 jumps out vigorously, or is suddenly exposed to the outside from the state where the needle 49 is positioned in the ink supply unit 120 (the state where the ink cartridge 14 is mounted), This is because the ink flows backward and scatters. Note that the ink splatter does not occur every time the ink cartridge 14 is attached or detached, and the ink scatters more often.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 47A, when the ink cartridge 14 is in the mounted posture, the detection unit 140 is located at a position corresponding to the ink remaining amount detection sensor 57, and therefore the ink supply unit 120 (or the needle 49). The detection unit 140 is located further upward. Most of the ink scattered from the needle 49 and the ink supply unit 120 scatters downward (in the direction of the counter-detection unit 140) due to its own weight, so that the detection unit 140 is simply provided above the ink supply unit 120, and the ink is transferred to the detection unit 140. Adhesion can be reduced. Furthermore, the detection surfaces 140a and 140b are formed by a plane parallel to a straight line connecting the cap insertion hole 605 and the center of the detection unit 140 (see FIG. 47B). Most of the ink that scatters from the cap insertion hole 605 scatters substantially linearly. Therefore, even if the ink scatters from the cap insertion hole 605, less ink adheres to the detection surfaces 140a and 140b, and the detection surfaces 140a and 140b. Ink can be reduced from adhering to the ink.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 47B, the ink cartridge 14 is detached during use, and the positional relationship between the ink supply unit 120 and the air introduction unit 130 depends on the mounting posture of the ink cartridge 14 (FIG. 47A). Position), that is, when the air introduction part 130 is located below and the ink supply part 120 is located above, the insertion hole 605 of the supply cap 600 of the ink supply part 120 is placed. Ink may drip from Since the ink dripping from the insertion hole 605 flows by its own weight, it flows out substantially linearly in the direction of the detection unit 140 and adheres to the detection surfaces 140a and 140b of the detection unit 140.

  However, in the state in which the detection unit 140 is arranged with the air introduction unit 130 below and the ink supply unit 120 above (the state of FIG. 47B), the detection surfaces 140a and 140b of the detection unit 140 are vertical. Since the ink is disposed in the direction (vertical direction with reference to the direction of the sign in FIG. 47B), the ink adhering to the detection surfaces 140a and 140b drips toward the atmosphere introduction unit 130 due to its own weight. Further, since the detection surfaces 140a and 140b are formed of a resin material with a smooth surface, the attached ink is liable to flow. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the adhesion of ink to the side surface of the detection unit 140. When the ink cartridge 14 is mounted, the ink supply unit 120 is disposed below and the air introduction unit 130 is disposed above (the posture shown in FIG. 47A). Even if ink is sometimes attached to the detection unit 140, it is possible to reduce the ink flowing to the ink supply unit 120 side and the ink from attaching to the detection surfaces 140a and 140b. Furthermore, as described above, since the edge 140c between the detection surfaces 140a and 140b and the side surface 110a of the frame portion 110 is formed at a substantially right angle, the ink adhering to the detection surfaces 140a and 140b is removed from the edge 140c. It is easy to flow downward by the action of capillary force. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the adhesion of ink to the detection surfaces 140a and 140b.

  As shown in FIG. 47C, the detection unit 140 is disposed inside the case 200, and the ink remaining amount detection sensor 57 emits light on both sides of the detection surfaces 140a and 140b by the case notches 213 and 223. A space into which the portion 57a and the light receiving portion 57b enter is formed. Therefore, since the detection unit 140 is covered with the case 200, even if ink splatters, the scattered ink can be prevented from adhering to the detection surfaces 140a and 140b of the detection unit 140. Furthermore, since a part of the ink supply unit 120 protrudes outward from the case 200, the distance to the detection unit 140 is increased in the mounting posture of the ink cartridge 14 (state shown in FIG. 47A). Therefore, since most of the scattered ink does not reach the detection unit 140, it is possible to reduce the adhesion of ink to the detection surfaces 140a and 140b. The case protrusions 214a and 224a and the case protrusions 214b and 224b are formed on both sides of the ink supply part 120 and the air introduction part 130, and protrude outward from the ink supply part 120. Therefore, when the ink cartridge 14 is dropped, the ink supply unit 120 can be prevented from coming into contact with the dropping surface, so that the ink can be prevented from flowing out of the ink supply unit 120 due to the impact of the contact. As a result, it is possible to reduce the adhesion of ink to the detection surfaces 140a and 140b.

  Next, the case 40 (see FIG. 2) of the refill unit 13 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 48 is a view showing the front of the case 40. FIG. 48 (a) is a front view of the case 40 that can store the large-capacity black or black ink cartridge 14 and the color ink ink cartridge 14. FIG. FIG. 48B is a front view of a case 2040 that can accommodate the black ink cartridge 14 and the color ink cartridge 14. In the present embodiment, the case 40 is disposed in the multi-function device 1, but the multi-function device 1 in which the case 2040 is disposed instead of the case 40 can also be provided. 49 is a cross-sectional view showing an outline of a cross section of the cases 40 and 2040, and FIG. 49 (a) is a cross-sectional view showing an outline of the case 40 along the XXXIXa-XXXIXa line of FIG. 48 (a). FIG. 49B is a cross-sectional view showing an outline of the case 2040 along the line XXXIXb-XXXIXb in FIG. FIG. 49 shows a cross section of the needle forming member 48 and the ink cartridge 14, and the other structures constituting the cases 40 and 2040 are omitted. 48 to 50, the color ink cartridge is shown as an ink cartridge 14c, the black ink cartridge is shown as an ink cartridge 14k1, and the large-capacity black ink cartridge is shown as an ink cartridge 14k2.

  As shown in FIG. 48A, the case 40 is configured so that four ink cartridges can be arranged and stored, and the arrangement of the four ink cartridges is such that three color ink cartridges 14c are arranged. Next, a large capacity black ink cartridge 14k2 or a black ink cartridge 14k1 is disposed. That is, the large-capacity black ink cartridge 14k2 or the black ink cartridge 14k1 is selectively stored at a position that is an end in the arrangement direction of the ink cartridges (the left-right direction in FIG. 48A). Note that a large capacity black ink cartridge 14k2 is accommodated in the case 40 shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 48B, the case 2040 is configured so that four ink cartridges can be arranged and stored. The arrangement of the four ink cartridges includes three ink cartridges 14c for color. And a black ink cartridge 14k1 is arranged next to it. That is, similarly to the case 40, the black ink cartridge 14k1 is housed in a position that is an end in the arrangement direction of the ink cartridges (the left-right direction in FIG. 48B).

  Since the case 40 can be mounted with both the large-capacity black ink cartridge 14k2 and the black ink cartridge 14k1, the case 40 is formed corresponding to the thickness of the large-capacity black ink cartridge 14k2. Therefore, the lateral width of the case 40 (width in the arrangement direction of the ink cartridges 14c and 14k2, FIG. 48 (a) left and right direction) t14 is the lateral width of the case 2040 (width in the arrangement direction of the ink cartridges 14c and 14k1, FIG. 48). (B) Left and right direction) It is longer than t15. The difference between the lateral width t14 of the case 40 and the lateral width t15 of the case 2040 is that the height of the standing wall portions 220b to 220e of the second case member 220 shown in FIG. 11 and the standing wall portion of the second case member 2220 shown in FIG. This corresponds to the difference from the height of 2220b to 2220e.

  Further, the case 40 is assumed to be selectively mounted with a black ink cartridge 14k1 and a large-capacity black ink cartridge 14k2, and the case 2040 is assumed to be mounted only with a black ink cartridge 14k1. . This means that two types of multi-function devices 1 are provided to the user. As described above, since a user with low text printing frequency does not need the large-capacity black ink cartridge 14k2, the user can not install the large-capacity black ink cartridge 14k2. An apparatus 1 is preferably provided. The case 2040 to which the black ink cartridge 14k1 is attached and the case 40 to which the large-capacity black ink cartridge 14k2 are attached are only slightly different in outer shape. It can be used, and cost reduction can be achieved.

  As shown in FIG. 49A, in a state where the ink cartridges 14c and 14k2 are housed in the case 40, the needle 49 enters the respective ink supply mechanisms 500 of the ink cartridges 14c and 14k2. The interval t16 between the needles 49 that enter the color ink cartridge 14c is the same interval, and the interval between the needle 49 that enters the large-capacity black ink cartridge 14k2 and the needle 49 that enters the adjacent color ink cartridge 14c. The distance t17 is longer than the distance t16. The difference between the interval t16 and the interval t17 is the height of the standing wall portions 210b to 210e of the first case member 210 shown in FIG. 8 and the height of the standing wall portions 2210b to 2210e of the first case member 2210 shown in FIG. It corresponds to the difference of.

  As shown in FIG. 49B, in a state where the ink cartridges 14c and 14k1 are stored in the case 2040, the needle 49 enters the ink supply mechanism 500 of each of the ink cartridges 14c and 14k1. The interval t16 between the needles 49 entering the color ink cartridge 14c and the interval t17 between the needle 49 entering the black ink cartridge 14k1 and the needle 49 entering the adjacent color ink cartridge 14c are the case. It is the same length as 40 intervals t16 and t17. This is because the black ink cartridge 14k1 in the case 2040 is stored (positioned) by placing the first case member 1210 on the color ink cartridge 14c side so that the needle entering the black ink cartridge 14k1. 49 and the needle 49 entering the color ink cartridge 14c adjacent to the needle 49 entering the color ink cartridge 14c adjacent to the needle 49 entering the large capacity black ink cartridge 14k2 of the case 40. It is because it becomes the same as the distance. In other words, the position of the ink supply unit 120 of the ink cartridge 14k1 and the position of the ink supply unit 120 of the ink cartridge 14k2 are the same position with respect to the position of the ink supply unit 120 of the ink cartridge 14c. As a result, the needle forming member 48 disposed in the case 40 and the case 2040 can be disposed in the same manner even when the lateral widths t14 and t15 of the cases 40 and 2040 are different. When two cases 2040 are manufactured, the needle forming member 48 becomes a common part, and the cost can be reduced.

  Further, as described above, the ink supply mechanism 500 is a valve mechanism that is biased by the first supply spring 630 and the second supply spring 650, and therefore, when the ink cartridge 14 is detached from the multi-function device 1, When the ink flows out from the supply unit 120 or in the worst case, the ink may be scattered around. The needles 49 are continuously arranged, and no partition plate is provided to partition the needles 49. Therefore, when ink splatters from the ink supply unit 120, the splattered ink adheres to the adjacent needles 49. End up. Since the needle 49 is a part that supplies ink to the multi-function device 1, when other ink colors are mixed in the needle 49, color change occurs during printing, and printing quality is degraded. In this embodiment, the black ink is a pigment-based ink, and the color ink is a dye-based ink. This is because black ink is mainly used in text printing, so it consists of pigment-based ink with low paper penetration to clarify the edges of characters, while color ink is mainly used for image printing Therefore, it is composed of dye-based ink that has high penetrability to paper in order to make the color of the dots less noticeable and make the colors more beautiful. The effect of color change when color inks are mixed is small, but when black ink is mixed with other color inks, the effect of color change becomes large, so black ink cannot be mixed with other color inks. It is not preferable. When it is confirmed that other ink colors are mixed, a return process (purge) for forcibly discharging ink is generally performed. However, useless ink is consumed for the return process. For this reason, the ink use efficiency is also reduced. Further, since the black ink is a pigment-based ink, the viscosity thereof is higher than that of the dye-based ink, and it cannot be easily removed even if the return process is performed. For this reason, the recovery process takes time, and the amount of ink that is wasted is increased. However, in this embodiment, the ink cartridges 14k1 and 14k2 in which the black ink is stored are disposed at the ends of the case 40 in the arrangement direction, and the ink supply unit 120 (and the needle 49) is further provided with a color ink cartridge. Since the shift is away from 14c, even if the black ink is scattered, the scattered ink can be made difficult to adhere to the adjacent needle 49. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in printing quality, and it is possible to suppress a large amount of wasted ink being consumed for the return process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50, a state in which the large-capacity black ink cartridge 14k2 or the black ink cartridge 14k1 and the color ink cartridge 14c are mounted in the case 40 will be described. FIG. 50 is a schematic cross-sectional view schematically showing a state where the ink cartridges 14c, 14k1, and 14k2 are mounted in the case 40. FIG. 50A shows the ink cartridges 14k1 and 14c in the case 40. FIG. 50B shows a state in which the ink cartridges 14k2 and 14c are attached in the case 40. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 50 (a), the bottom plate portion 42 and the top plate portion 44 of the refill unit 13 (case 40) are provided with case welded portions 216, 226, 1216 and case welded portions 217, 227 of the case 200 or the case 1200. , 1217 can be stored, and storage grooves 42c1 to 42c4 and 44c1 to 44c4 are formed. The storage grooves 42c1 to 42c4 and 44c1 to 44c4 are all formed in the same shape.

  Further, the storage grooves 42c1 and 42c2 and the storage grooves 42c2 and 42c3 are separated by a distance t12, and the storage grooves 42c3 and 42c4 are separated by a distance t13 longer than the distance t12. As described above, this is because the black ink cartridge 14k1 has a larger outer shape than the other color ink cartridges 14c, and the ink supply unit 120 of the black ink cartridge 14k1 and The air introduction unit 130 is shifted by a difference between the distance t12 and the distance t13 in a direction away from the ink supply unit 120 and the air introduction unit 130 of the other color ink cartridge 14c (the left-right direction in FIG. 50). It is. The difference between the distance t12 and the distance t13 is the same as the difference between the interval t16 and the interval t17 between the needles 49 described above, and the height of the standing wall portions 210b to 210e of the first case member 210 shown in FIG. FIG. 11 shows the difference between the height of the standing wall portions 2210b to 2210e of the first case member 2210 shown in FIG. 13 or the height of the standing wall portions 210b to 210e of the first case member 210 shown in FIG. This corresponds to the difference from the height of the standing wall portions 1210b to 1210e of the first case member 1210.

  Further, a predetermined space X is formed between the outer surface of the second case 220 and the inner surface of the side plate portion 43 of the black ink cartridge 14k1. The predetermined space X is formed corresponding to the large capacity black ink cartridge 14k2. That is, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), the refill unit 13 is used for both the black ink cartridge 14k1 and the large-capacity black ink cartridge 14k2.

  As shown in FIG. 50B, when the large-capacity black ink cartridge 14k2 is mounted in the refill unit 13, the space formed when the black ink cartridge 14k1 is mounted is filled. Furthermore, the positions of the ink supply unit 120 and the air introduction unit 130 are the same when the ink cartridge 14k1 is mounted and when the ink cartridge 14k2 is mounted. Therefore, even when the black ink cartridges 14k1 and 14k2 are used, the case 40 can also be used, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the combination of the component configurations of the cases 200, 1200, and 2200 will be described. FIG. 51 is a schematic diagram schematically showing combinations of case members 210, 220, 1210, 2210, and 2220.

  FIG. 51A is a schematic diagram of the case 200. FIG. According to the present embodiment, the case 200 includes first and second case members 210 and 220, and the thicknesses of the first and second case members 210 and 220 (the first and second case members 210 and 220). The heights 220 of the standing wall portions 210b to 210e and 220b to 220e (FIG. 51 (a) in the left-right direction) each have a thickness t18.

  FIG. 51 (b) is a schematic diagram of the case 2200. The case 2200 is formed by first and second case members 2210 and 2220, and the thickness of the first and second case members 2210 and 2220 (the standing wall portions 2210b to 2210e of the first and second case members 2210 and 2220). , 2220b to 2220e (FIG. 51 (b) left and right direction) has a thickness t19 that is approximately twice the thickness t18.

  FIG. 51C is a schematic diagram of the case 1200. The case 1200 is formed by first and second case members 1210 and 220, and the thickness of the first and second case members 1210 and 220 (the standing wall portions 1210b to 1210e of the first and second case members 1210 and 220). , 220b to 220e (FIG. 51 (c) left and right direction), the first case member 1210 has a thickness t19, and the second case member 220 has a thickness t18.

  Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the three types of cases 200 having different outer shape sizes (different inner capacities) from the two first case members having different thicknesses and the two second case members having different thicknesses. , 1200, 2200 are formed. In the present embodiment, the thicknesses of the first and second case members 210 and 220 constituting the case 200 are equal, and the thicknesses of the first and second case members 2210 and 2220 constituting the case 2200 are also equal. However, the equal thickness is not an indispensable condition for forming the three types of cases 200, 1200, and 2200 having different outer shapes. That is, one of the case members constituting the third ink cartridge (case 200) having the smallest thickness on one side (first case member 2210) of the case member constituting the largest first ink cartridge (case 2200). A third ink cartridge having the smallest thickness on the other side (second case member 2220) of the case member constituting the largest first ink cartridge, which is larger than the thickness of the second side (first case member 210). If the thickness is larger than the thickness of the other case member (second case member 220), three types of cases having different outer shapes can be produced from the four case members. The condition described above is referred to as a first condition. Note that four types of cases can be produced from the four case members by adding further conditions in addition to the first condition. This will be described in detail later.

  Cases 200, 1200, and 2200 are made of a resin material and are manufactured by injection molding. Therefore, a mold corresponding to each case 200, 1200, 2200 is required, and six types are required when molds corresponding to all cases are manufactured. That is, since the case 200, 1200, 2200 has a space inside, in order to configure them, at least two members such as a container main body having one surface opened and a lid for closing the opening are formed. If the sizes of the three cases 200, 1200, and 2200 are different from each other as in this embodiment, six types of members are required.

  However, since the mold is expensive, it is preferable to make the mold as common as possible. In this embodiment, the second case member 220 for black is shared with the second case member 220 for color. Therefore, since a dedicated mold is not required for the second case member 220 for black, the cost can be reduced. Further, the first case member 1210 for black is deepened with respect to the first case member 210 for collar, and only a rib 1218 is provided. Therefore, the leading end side of the standing wall portions 1210b to 1210e from the rib 1218 for the first case member 1210 for black has the same shape as the leading end side of the standing wall portions 210b to 210e of the first case member 210 for collar. Therefore, the mold corresponding to the main part for the first case members 1210 and 210 is made common, and the member corresponding to the first case member 210 and the member corresponding to the first case member 1210 are respectively exchanged, so that the first Case members 1210 and 210 can be manufactured. That is, the cost can be reduced as compared with the case of producing two types of molds. Further, the first case member 2210 for large-capacity black has the same shape as that obtained by removing the rib 1218 of the first case member 1210 for black, and therefore corresponds to the main part of the first case members 210, 1210, and 2210. Can be used in common. Thus, even when there are a plurality of types of ink cartridges 144c, 14k1, and 14k2, the cost can be reduced by sharing the mold as much as possible. Further, in the cases 200, 1200, and 2200 having different sizes, the through holes for causing the ink supply unit 120 and the air introduction unit 130 to protrude to the outside have the same shape, and are substantially semicircular corresponding to half of the through holes. The case cutouts 211, 212, 221, 222, 1211, 1212, 2211, 2122, 2221, 222 in the shape of the first case member 210, the second case member 220, the first case member 1210 for black, the large capacity black By forming the first case member 2210 for the metal and the second case member 2220 for the large capacity black as the same substantially semicircular shape, the partial structure of each mold can be shared, The cost for designing the mold is reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the case 1200 is configured by the second case member 220 of the case 200 and the first case member 1210 formed in substantially the same shape as the first case member 2210 of the case 2200, but FIG. ), The case 1200α may be configured by the first case member 210 of the case 200 and the second case member 1220 formed in substantially the same shape as the second case member 2220 of the case 2200. The case members 210 and 220 are formed to have substantially the same height of the standing wall portions 210b to 210e and 220b to 220e, and the case members 2210 and 2220 are formed to have the substantially same height of the standing wall portions 210b to 210e and 220b to 220e. Therefore, the sizes of the outer shapes of the case 1200a and the case 1200 are substantially the same.

  Further, a case consisting of a combination of the first case member 210 and the second case member 2220 or a case consisting of a combination of the first case member 2210 and the second case member 220 is configured as a case for black. It is also good. That is, as a case configuration, a combination of case members capable of forming three cases: a small case for color, a large case for large-capacity black, and a medium case for black If so, the combination may be any combination.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a view showing the ink cartridge 3014 and the refill unit 3013 of the second embodiment, and FIG. 52 (a) is a view showing the side of the ink cartridge 3014 of the second embodiment. FIG. 52B is a diagram illustrating a cross section in a state where the ink cartridge 3014 is mounted in the refill unit 3013.

  As shown in FIG. 52A, the ink cartridge 3014 according to the second embodiment is configured such that the position of the air introduction unit 130 is different from that of the ink cartridge 14 according to the first embodiment. In the ink cartridge 3014 of the second embodiment, the atmosphere is introduced into the ink cartridge 3014 from the through hole 3130 formed in the upper surface of the case 3200 through the atmosphere introduction passage 3131 formed in a labyrinth shape.

  As shown in FIG. 52 (b), in the refill unit 3013 of the second embodiment, the position of the press holding member 3061 provided on the door 41 is the same as that of the press holding member 61 provided on the door 41 of the first embodiment. It is configured to be lower than the position. This is because the air introduction portion is not provided on the side surface of the ink cartridge 3014 of the second embodiment that faces the pressing holding member 3061. Therefore, the elastic force that acts when the ink cartridge 3014 is mounted in the refill unit 3013. This is because (the elastic force of the first supply spring 630 and the second supply spring 650) acts only on the lower part of the ink cartridge 3014. Therefore, in order to stably mount the ink cartridge 3014 in the refill unit 3013, the press holding member 3061 and the ink supply unit 120 are configured to be substantially on the same straight line in the horizontal direction (FIG. 52 (b) left-right direction). Has been. By being positioned on substantially the same straight line, the direction in which the elastic force acts is also substantially on the same straight line. Therefore, the ink cartridge 3014 can be prevented from being inclined and can be stably mounted.

  The ink cartridge 3014 of the second embodiment may be configured to include the ink storage body 100 inside, or may be configured to store ink in the case 3200.

  Next, the third and fourth embodiments will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the ink cartridges 4014 and 5014 of the third and fourth embodiments, and FIG. 53A is a perspective view showing the appearance of the ink cartridge 4014 of the third embodiment. FIG. 53B is a perspective view showing the appearance of the ink cartridge 5014 of the fourth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 53 (a), the ink cartridge 4014 of the third embodiment is formed with a through hole 4130 for introducing air into the ink cartridge 4014 on a part of its upper surface (the upper surface in FIG. 53 (a)). Then, the air introduced from the through hole 4130 is introduced into the ink cartridge 4014 through a labyrinth-like air introduction passage 4131 (a passage having a small inner diameter and a relatively long distance). A seal member 4132 is attached to the ink cartridge 4014 in order to prevent degassing and outflow of ink in the ink cartridge 4014 in a state before use. When the ink cartridge 4014 is used, the seal member 4132 is peeled off and then attached to the multi-function device 1.

  From one end surface of the ink cartridge 4014 extending in a substantially vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 53 (a)), a detection unit 4140 (irradiated portion) is formed to protrude outward, and further, an ink supply unit is formed below the detection unit 4140. 4120 is formed. An ink supply port 4121 into which the needle 49 is inserted is formed at the protruding tip of the ink supply unit 4120. Note that the ink cartridge 4014 of the third embodiment does not have a configuration corresponding to the ink reservoir 100, and ink is directly stored in the housing.

  On the right side of FIG. 53 (a), a cross-sectional view of a two-dot chain line in the drawing is shown. As shown in the drawing, inside the ink supply part 4120, a joint 4122 that forms an insertion part through which the needle 49 is inserted, and a valve 4123 that is arranged inward of the ink cartridge 4014 of the joint 4122 and closes the opening of the joint 4122. In addition, a spring member 4124 for urging the valve 4123 toward the joint 4122 is provided. These constitute a valve mechanism for opening and closing the ink supply port 4121. Further, a partition wall 4125 that partitions the inside of the ink cartridge 4014 and the ink supply unit 4120 is provided integrally with the main body of the ink cartridge 4014. As shown in FIG. 53A, the partition wall 4125 forms a space for accommodating the valve mechanism.

  As shown in FIG. 53B, the ink cartridge 5014 of the fourth embodiment is replaced with the ink supply unit 4120 of the third embodiment, and an ink supply unit 5120 having the same shape as the ink supply unit 120 of the first embodiment. Is formed. Since the other structure is the same as that of the ink cartridge of the third embodiment, its detailed description is omitted.

  In addition, the detection part 4140 of 3rd and 4th Example is good also as a thing equipped with the sensor arm 470 inside like 1st Example. If the sensor arm 470 is provided, the remaining amount of ink can be accurately detected in a state where the ink cartridges 4014 and 5014 are mounted on the multi-function device 1. In the third and fourth embodiments, the protrusions (first protrusions) formed by the case protrusions 214a and 224a and the protrusions (first protrusions) formed by the case protrusions 214b and 224b are omitted. These may be provided.

  The present invention has been described above based on the embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various improvements and modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be easily guessed.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56, a modified example of the combination of the case members will be described. FIG. 54 to FIG. 56 are diagrams for explaining modifications of the combination of case members, and an outline of the case members is shown. As described above, in this embodiment, the first case member 210 and the first case members 1210 and 2210 having different thicknesses, and the second case member 220 and the second case member 2220 having different thicknesses are used. Three types of cases 200, 1200 (or 1200α), 2200 having different outer shape sizes were formed. Instead of this, the combination of the case members according to the modified example can form four types of cases having different outer shapes (different inner volumes) from the four case members. This will be described below.

  First, a description will be given with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 54A, the case C1 is composed of a case member 120 and a case member r21. As for the thickness of each of the case members l20 and r21, the case member l20 is configured with a thickness t20, and the case member r21 is configured with a thickness t21 that is thicker than the thickness t20. As shown in FIG. 54 (b), the case C2 includes a case member l21 and a case member r22. As for the thickness of each of the case members l21 and r22, the case member l21 is configured by a thickness t21, and the case member r22 is configured by a thickness t22 that is thicker than the thickness t21. Furthermore, the difference between the thickness t22 of the case member r22 and the thickness t21 of the case member r21 is different from the difference between the thickness t21 of the case member l21 and the thickness t20 of the case member l20.

  When the combination of the case members l20 and r21 constituting the case C1 and the case members l21 and r22 constituting the case C2 is changed, the case C3 shown in FIG. 54 (c) and the case C4 shown in FIG. 54 (d). And are formed. Specifically, the case C3 includes a case member 120 and a case member r22, and the case C4 includes a case member 121 and a case member r21.

  Accordingly, there are two types of cases C1 and C2 which are small-scale from four case members of case members l20 and r21 which constitute the case C1 and case members l21 and r22 which constitute the case C2. Cases C3 and C4 having a middle scale are formed. Cases C1 to C4 are all different in outer shape size (thickness) and have a relationship of C1 <C4 <C3 <C2. Therefore, four cases having different outer shapes can be formed according to the amount of ink to be stored from the four case members l20, r21, l21, and r22.

  Thus, in order to produce four types of cases having different outer shape sizes from the four case members, the following second condition is required in addition to the first condition described above. The second condition is that the thickness t22 on one side (case member r22) of the case member constituting the largest first ink cartridge (case C2) and the case constituting the smallest third ink cartridge (C1). The difference (t22-t21) from the thickness t21 on one side (case member r21) of the member is the smallest with the thickness t21 on the other side (case member l21) of the case member constituting the largest first ink cartridge. The difference is that the difference (t21−t20) from the thickness t20 of the other side (case member 120) of the case member constituting the third ink cartridge. For example, when t20 = 10 mm, t21 = 25 mm, and t22 = 40 mm (t22−t21 = 15 mm, t21−t20 = 15 mm) so that the first condition is satisfied and the second condition is not satisfied, the thickness of each case is C1. = 35 mm, C2 = 65 mm, C3 = 50 mm, C4 = 50 mm, and only three types of cases can be produced, but t20 = 10 mm, t21 = 20 mm, t22 = so as to satisfy the first condition and the second condition. Assuming 40 mm (t22−t21 = 20 mm, t21−t20 = 10 mm), the thickness of each case is C1 = 30 mm, C2 = 60 mm, C3 = 50 mm, and C4 = 40 mm. be able to.

  Next, a description will be given with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 55A, the case C5 includes a case member l20 and a case member r20. The thicknesses of the case members l20 and r20 are t20. Case C2 shown in FIG. 55 (b) is the same as case C2 in FIG. 54 (b), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  When the combination of the case members l20 and r20 constituting the case C5 and the case members l21 and r22 constituting the case C2 is changed, the case C3 shown in FIG. 55C and the case C6 shown in FIG. And are formed. Specifically, the case C3 includes a case member 120 and a case member r22, and the case C6 includes a case member 121 and a case member r20. Further, the difference between the thickness t22 of the case member r22 and the thickness t20 of the case member r20 is different from the difference between the thickness t21 of the case member l21 and the thickness t20 of the case member l20, and the first condition and the second condition described above are satisfied. I am also satisfied.

  Therefore, there are two types of cases: a case C5 which is a small scale and a case C2 which is a large scale, from four case members of the case members 120 and r20 constituting the case C5 and the case members 1121 and r22 constituting the case C2. Cases C3 and C6 having a middle scale are formed. The cases C2, 3, 5, and 6 are all different in outer shape size (thickness), and have a relationship of C5 <C6 <C3 <C2. Accordingly, it is possible to form four cases having different outer shapes according to the amount of ink to be stored from the four case members l20, r20, l21, r22.

  Next, a description will be given with reference to FIG. Since the case C1 shown in FIG. 56A is the same as the case C1 shown in FIG. 54, the description thereof is omitted. As shown in FIG. 56 (b), the case C7 includes a case member 122 and a case member r22. The thickness of the case members l22 and r22 is t22.

  When the combination of the case members l20 and r21 constituting the case C1 and the case members l22 and r22 constituting the case C7 is changed, the case C3 shown in FIG. 56C and the case C8 shown in FIG. And are formed. Specifically, the case C3 includes a case member 120 and a case member r22, and the case C8 includes a case member 122 and a case member r21. Further, the difference between the thickness t22 of the case member r22 and the thickness t21 of the case member r21 is different from the difference between the thickness t22 of the case member 122 and the thickness t20 of the case member 120, and the above-described first condition and second condition are satisfied. I am also satisfied.

  Accordingly, there are two types of case C1, a small case C1 and a large case C7, from the four case members of the case members l20 and r21 constituting the case C1 and the case members l22 and r22 constituting the case C7. Cases C3 and C8 having a middle scale are formed. The cases C1, 3, 7, and 8 are all different in outer shape size (thickness), and have a relationship of C1 <C3 <C8 <C7. Accordingly, it is possible to form four cases having different outer shapes according to the amount of ink to be stored from the four case members l20, r21, 122, and r22.

  As described above, in the case member forming each case, when the thickness of the case member arranged on one side is different from the thickness of the case member arranged on the other side, the case member is removed from the four case members. Four cases having different shapes (different contents) can be formed.

  Next, another modification of the present embodiment will be described. In the above embodiment, the supply valve 620 and the atmospheric valve 720 are attached in the direction of the supply joint 610 and the atmospheric joint 710 by the elastic force of the first and second supply springs 630 and 650 and the first and second atmospheric springs 730 and 750. The ink flow path K and the air introduction path L were closed by force. On the other hand, the supply valve and the atmospheric valve may be urged in the direction of the supply joint and the atmospheric joint by the elastic force of the coil spring member made of a metal material or a resin material to close the ink flow path and the atmospheric introduction path. good. Further, if a coil spring having at least a part formed in a conical shape is used, the ink supply mechanism and the air introduction mechanism can be reduced in scale. In addition, the first supply spring 630, the second supply spring 650, the first atmospheric spring 730, and the second atmospheric spring 750 are in direct contact with each other without the supply slider 640 and the atmospheric slider 740, and the supply valve and The atmospheric valve may be configured to have a simple structure including only the bottom plate. With this configuration, the structure of the ink supply mechanism and the air introduction mechanism is simplified, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, the first supply (atmosphere) spring and the second supply (atmosphere) spring may be integrally connected. Further, the supply valve 620 and the atmospheric valve 720 are not provided with the valve hook portions 626 and 726, but the supply (atmosphere) slider 640 (740) and the first and second supply (atmosphere) springs 630 and 650 (730 and 750). And the supply (atmosphere) slider and the first and second supply (atmosphere) springs that are integrally connected to each other may be configured to be freely operable.

  In addition, the check valve 670 includes the umbrella portion 671 and the shaft portion 672, but may include only the umbrella portion 671. Since the check valve 670 is for preventing the backflow of ink, it is sufficient that the check valve 670 can be configured to shield the communication between the first cover through-hole 683 and the second cover through-hole 684 of the cover 680. Further, the cover 680 may be configured such that the second cover through hole 684 is not formed.

  In the above embodiment, the joint protrusion 614 and the joint contact portion 613 of the supply joint 610 are formed in a countersink shape. It may be formed. Since the displacement of the joint protrusion is absorbed by the groove, it is possible to reduce the displacement of the joint abutting portion in the insertion direction as the needle 49 is inserted. Furthermore, if the inner diameter of the joint contact portion is formed larger than the inner diameter of the joint projection portion, it is possible to reduce the displacement of the joint projection portion from being transmitted to the joint contact portion.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the film 160 is welded to both sides of the first opening 112a and the second opening 112b of the frame part 110, but one opening is closed by the side wall, and the film 160 is attached only to the other opening. You may comprise so that it may weld. In this case, if the side of the second opening 112b is closed by the side wall and the film 160 is welded to the first opening 112a, the side wall of the atmosphere connection path 433 is formed by the film 160, so that a meniscus is formed in the atmosphere connection path 433. The formation can be reduced. Further, when the second opening 112b side is closed with a side wall, the side wall serves as a support plate, and the strength of the frame portion is maintained, so that there is no connection formation portion (partition plate) for connecting the ink storage chambers. It may be configured. In this case, the inner circumference welded portion may be erected only from one surface side of the support plate.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the film 160 welded to the flame | frame part 110 shall be comprised with the nylon part by the flame | frame part 110 side, it is good also as what gives a water-repellent coating to the nylon layer. With this configuration, it is possible to further prevent the meniscus from being formed in the atmosphere connection path 433.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the atmosphere communication path forming portion 430 is configured to be inclined downward from the first atmosphere communication chamber 431 toward the second atmosphere communication chamber 432, but one surface of the atmosphere connection path 433 is the film 160. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a meniscus from being formed in the atmosphere connection path 433. Therefore, the atmosphere communication path forming portion 430 is not necessarily configured to be inclined downward, and may be configured to be horizontal in the mounting posture of the ink cartridge 14.

  In the above embodiment, all the welding steps are performed by ultrasonic welding. However, in the case where the bonding can be performed with an adhesive, the bonding may be performed using an adhesive. It may be used and welded. For example, since welding of the case 200 is not required if the first and second case members 210 and 220 are not peeled off, the case 200 can be bonded with an adhesive.

  The ink cartridge, ink reservoir, ink cartridge package, ink cartridge package manufacturing method, and ink cartridge manufacturing method according to the present invention will be described below.

  An ink cartridge comprising an ink reservoir having an internal space for storing ink, and a case containing the ink reservoir, wherein the ink reservoir is attached to an ink jet recording apparatus that performs recording by discharging the ink. A frame member having an opening communicating with the internal space, and a film that is fixed to an opening peripheral edge of the opening and seals the opening, and the frame member includes a rib that supports the film from the internal space side. An ink cartridge A1 is provided.

  In the ink cartridge A1, the film is fixed to the rib.

  In the ink cartridge A2, the fixing of the film and the rib is performed by melting at least one of the film and the rib and joining each other.

  In the ink cartridge A2 or A3, the fixing portion of the rib fixed to the film is located on the same virtual plane as the fixing portion at the opening peripheral edge of the opening fixed to the film. Ink cartridge A4.

  In any one of the ink cartridges A1 to A4, the rib is configured to regulate the displacement when a part of the case that is opposed to the opening is displaced toward the opening. Characteristic ink cartridge A5.

  In any one of the ink cartridges A1 to A5, in the posture attached to the ink jet recording apparatus, the rib is formed to be inclined downward and the downward inclined end portion is formed as a free end, and the ink that flows by gravity. The ink cartridge A6 is characterized in that it can be guided toward the bottom side of the internal space.

  The ink cartridge A7 according to any one of the ink cartridges A1 to A6, wherein a plurality of the ribs are dispersedly arranged in an opening region of the frame member.

  In any one of the ink cartridges A1 to A7, the frame member includes an outer frame portion that defines the opening, and a support plate that extends substantially parallel to the opening surface of the opening from the outer frame portion, and the rib An ink cartridge A8 which is erected on the support plate.

  An ink reservoir A9 that is used in any of the ink cartridges A1 to A8.

  An ink cartridge comprising an ink reservoir having an internal space for storing ink, and a case containing the ink reservoir, wherein the ink reservoir is attached to an ink jet recording apparatus that performs recording by discharging the ink. A frame member having a first opening and a second opening communicating with the internal space, and a film fixed to the periphery of each opening of the first opening and the second opening and closing the first opening and the second opening, respectively. The frame member includes a partition plate that partitions the internal space into a first chamber on the first opening side and a second chamber on the second opening side, and is erected from the partition plate from the first opening side. An ink cartridge comprising: a first rib that supports the film; and a second rib that is erected from the partition plate and supports the film from the second opening side. B1.

  In the ink cartridge B1, the film is fixed to the first rib and the second rib, respectively.

  In the ink cartridge B2, the film is fixed to the first rib and the second rib by melting at least one of the film and the first rib and the second rib to join each other. An ink cartridge B3.

  In the ink cartridge B2 or B3, the fixing portion of the first rib fixed to the film is located on the first virtual plane together with the fixing portion at the opening periphery of the first opening fixed to the film, The ink cartridge B4, wherein the fixing portion of the second rib fixed to the film is located on the second imaginary plane together with the fixing portion at the opening periphery of the second opening fixed to the film.

  The ink cartridge B5, wherein the first virtual plane and the second virtual plane are parallel to each other in the ink cartridge B4.

  In any of the ink cartridges B1 to B5, when a part of the case that is opposed to the first opening and the second opening is displaced toward the first opening and the second opening, the displacements are changed. An ink cartridge B6, wherein the first rib and the second rib are respectively restricted.

  In any one of the ink cartridges B1 to B6, the first rib and the second rib are formed so as to be inclined downward and the downward inclined end portion is formed as a free end in the posture mounted on the ink jet recording apparatus. The ink cartridge B7 is configured to be able to guide the ink flowing by gravity toward the bottom side of the first chamber and the second chamber.

  The ink cartridge B8 according to any one of the ink cartridges B1 to B7, wherein a plurality of the first ribs and the second ribs are dispersedly arranged in the opening region of the frame member.

  The ink cartridge B9 according to any one of the ink cartridges B1 to B8, wherein the partition plate includes a communication path that communicates the first chamber and the second chamber.

  The ink cartridge B9 includes a rotation member that is pivotally supported in the internal space and rotates as the ink decreases, and the rotation member is disposed in the communication path. Ink cartridge B10.

  In the ink cartridge B10, the rotating member includes a substantially cylindrical shaft-shaped portion, and the partition plate includes a holding portion that rotatably holds the shaft-shaped portion of the rotating member, and the holding portion. Is formed in a substantially C-shaped cross section with the side facing the communication path open, and the shaft-shaped portion of the rotating member is inserted and held in the holding portion of the partition plate, whereby the rotating member is An ink cartridge B11 which is rotatably supported by the partition plate.

  In any one of the ink cartridges B1 to B11, the frame member includes an auxiliary wall portion erected from the partition plate, and the auxiliary wall portion has a lower erection height than the rib. Characteristic ink cartridge B12.

  In the ink cartridge B12, the auxiliary wall portion is configured to be thinner than the rib.

  In the ink cartridge B12 or B13, the auxiliary wall portion is erected from the partition plate at an end edge portion of the partition plate adjacent to the communication path.

  In any of the ink cartridges B12 to B14, when there are a plurality of the ribs, the auxiliary wall portion connects the plurality of ribs to the ink cartridge B15.

  In any one of the ink cartridges B1 to B15, the frame member includes an outer frame portion that defines the first opening and the second opening, and the partition plate is between the opening surfaces of the first opening and the second opening. An ink cartridge B16 formed so as to extend from the outer frame portion in a space.

  An ink reservoir B17 that is used in any one of the ink cartridges B1 to B16.

  An ink cartridge including an ink storage body having an internal space for storing ink, and mounted on an ink jet recording apparatus that performs recording by discharging the ink, wherein the ink storage body includes an ink injection capable of press-fitting a plug member therein. An injection portion having a flow path; and a communication portion that communicates the ink injection flow path of the injection portion to the internal space, the communication portion including a first hole that communicates with the ink injection flow path of the injection portion; A second hole communicating with the internal space; a connection flow path connecting the first hole and the second hole and communicating the ink injection flow path and the internal space; The second hole is positioned above the first hole when the ink reservoir takes an ink injection posture, which is a posture at the time of ink injection operation for injecting ink into the internal space through a path. When That ink cartridge C1.

  In the ink cartridge C1, the ink reservoir includes a frame member having an opening and a film fixed to the opening periphery of the opening, and the opening of the frame member is sealed with the film, whereby the frame member The internal space is formed between the film and the film, and the communication portion includes a wall portion standing in the internal space, and the film is fixed to the wall portion, The ink cartridge C2 is characterized in that the connection channel is formed between a wall portion and the film.

  In the ink cartridge C2, the wall portion is erected from the outer surface of the injection portion.

  In the ink cartridge C2 or C3, the fixed portion of the wall portion fixed to the film is located on the same virtual plane as the fixed portion at the opening peripheral edge of the opening fixed to the film. An ink cartridge C4.

  In any one of the ink cartridges C1 to C4, the second hole of the communication portion is located on the opening side of the ink injection channel that is the start end side of the plug member in the press-fitting direction, and the first hole of the communication portion. Is located on the bottom side of the ink injection channel, which is the end side in the press-fitting direction of the plug member.

  The ink cartridge C6 according to any one of the ink cartridges C2 to C5, wherein the connection flow path of the communication portion extends linearly.

  The ink cartridge C7 according to any one of the ink cartridges C1 to C6, wherein the communication portion is positioned at an uppermost position of the internal space in the ink injection posture.

  In any one of the ink cartridges C1 to C7, the ink reservoir is configured as a substantially flat hexahedron, and the injection portion is formed from a side surface that is connected to a pair of surfaces having the largest area of the substantially hexahedron. An ink cartridge C8, which is disposed inside the ink reservoir so as to press-fit the plug member.

  In any one of the ink cartridges C9 to C10, the ink injection operation includes injecting ink into the internal space through the ink injection flow path, and further sucking the internal space through the ink injection flow path to decompress the internal space. An ink cartridge C9, which is characterized by

  In the ink cartridge C9, the ink injection operation is to suck the internal space and decompress the internal space before injecting ink into the internal space.

  An ink storage body having an internal space for storing ink; and an air introduction section for introducing air into the internal space of the ink storage body, wherein the ink storage body includes a first surface and a second surface facing each other, and these The air introduction portion is disposed on the side surface of the ink reservoir and performs recording by ejecting the ink. In the ink cartridge mounted on the ink jet recording apparatus, the ink reservoir includes an atmosphere communication path that guides the atmosphere from the atmosphere introduction section to the internal space, and the atmosphere communication path communicates with the atmosphere introduction section. A first communication chamber, a second communication chamber communicating with the internal space, and a connection path connecting the second communication chamber and the first communication chamber, wherein the first communication chamber and the second communication chamber are: Bottom on the first side Is formed as a space in which the ceiling surface is located on the second surface side, and the first hole for communicating the first communication chamber and the air introduction part is spaced from the bottom surface of the first communication chamber. The ink cartridge D1 is characterized in that the ink cartridge D1 is disposed and a second hole for communicating the connection path and the second communication chamber is spaced from the ceiling surface of the second communication chamber.

  In the ink cartridge D1, when the first surface is placed as a placement surface, the first hole is located above the second hole, and the second surface is placed as a placement surface. In this case, the ink cartridge D2 is configured such that the second hole is positioned above the first hole.

  In the ink cartridge D1 or D2, the ink cartridge D3 is characterized in that the first hole is opened at a side wall surface of the first communication chamber and is in contact with a ceiling surface of the first communication chamber.

  The ink cartridge according to any one of the ink cartridges D1 to D3, wherein the second hole is opened at a side wall surface of the second communication chamber and is in contact with a bottom surface of the second communication chamber. D4.

  In any one of the ink cartridges D1 to D4, the second communication chamber is formed with at least two holes, a third hole and a fourth hole, for communicating the second communication chamber and the internal space. Characteristic ink cartridge D5.

  The ink cartridge D5 includes a partition plate that partitions the internal space into a first chamber and a second chamber, and the ceiling surface of the second communication chamber is configured to also serve as the partition plate, and the third hole is the An ink cartridge D6 having an opening in a side wall surface of the second communication chamber, and the fourth hole being opened in a ceiling surface of the second communication chamber.

  In the ink cartridge D6, the ink cartridge D7 is characterized in that the fourth hole is opened at a corner portion of the ceiling surface that is located farthest from the second hole.

  In the ink cartridge D6, the fourth hole is located in the uppermost position in the second communication chamber in the mounting posture to the ink jet recording apparatus.

  In any one of the ink cartridges D5 to D8, the opening area of the second hole is smaller than the opening areas of the third hole and the fourth hole.

  The ink cartridge D10 according to any one of the ink cartridges D5 to D9, wherein a flow path cross-sectional area of the connection path is smaller than an opening area of the third hole and the fourth hole.

  The ink cartridge D11 according to any one of the ink cartridges D1 to D10, wherein an opening area of the second hole is smaller than an opening area of the first hole.

  The ink cartridge D12 according to any one of the ink cartridges D1 to D11, wherein a flow path cross-sectional area of the connection path is smaller than an opening area of the first hole.

  In any one of the ink cartridges D1 to D12, the ink reservoir includes a frame member having an opening communicating with the internal space, and a film that is fixed to an opening peripheral edge of the opening and seals the opening. An ink cartridge D13, wherein a ceiling surface of a path and a side wall surface of the connection path are formed by the frame member, and a bottom surface of the connection path is formed by the film.

  In the ink cartridge D13, a ceiling surface of the first communication chamber and a side wall surface of the first communication chamber are formed by the frame member, and a bottom surface of the first communication chamber is formed by the film. Ink cartridge D14.

  In the ink cartridge D13 or D14, the ceiling surface of the second communication chamber and the side wall surface of the second communication chamber are formed by the frame member, and the bottom surface of the second communication chamber is formed by the film. An ink cartridge D15.

  In the ink cartridge D14 or D15, the third hole is disposed at a position where the third hole is opened on the side wall surface of the second communication chamber and in contact with the bottom surface of the second communication chamber, and a part of the opening periphery of the third hole is formed. An ink cartridge D16 formed of the film.

  In any one of the ink cartridges D1 to D16, in the mounting posture to the ink jet recording apparatus, the air communication path is disposed above the internal space, and from the communication side with the air introduction portion, The ink cartridge D17 is configured such that the atmosphere communication path is inclined downward toward the communication side.

  The ink cartridge D18 according to any one of the ink cartridges D13 to D16, wherein the film has a water-repellent finish at least at a portion forming a bottom surface of the atmosphere communication path.

  An ink storage body having an internal space for storing ink and an air communication path for introducing air to the internal space; and an air introduction section that is disposed on a side surface of the ink storage body and introduces air to the air communication path, In an ink cartridge attached to an ink jet recording apparatus that performs recording by discharging the ink, the atmosphere communication path is disposed above the internal space and the air introduction portion is mounted in the ink jet recording apparatus in a mounting posture. The ink cartridge E1 is configured such that the atmosphere communication path is inclined downward from the communication side to the communication side with the internal space.

  In the ink cartridge E1, the ink reservoir includes a frame member having an opening that communicates with the internal space, and a film that is fixed to an opening peripheral edge of the opening and seals the opening. An ink cartridge E2 having a surface formed of the film.

  An ink storage body having an internal space for storing ink and an air communication path for introducing air to the internal space; and an air introduction section that is disposed on a side surface of the ink storage body and introduces air to the air communication path, In an ink cartridge mounted on an ink jet recording apparatus that performs recording by discharging ink, the ink reservoir is fixed to a frame member having an opening communicating with the internal space and an opening periphery of the opening. An ink cartridge E3, wherein one surface of the atmosphere communication path is formed of the film.

  In the ink cartridge E3, in the mounting posture to the ink jet recording apparatus, the atmosphere communication path is disposed above the internal space, and as it goes from the communication side with the atmosphere introduction unit toward the communication side with the internal space. The ink cartridge E4 is configured so that the atmosphere communication path is inclined downward.

  The ink cartridge E5 according to any one of the ink cartridges E2 to E4, wherein the film is subjected to water repellent processing at least at a portion forming the one surface of the atmosphere communication path.

  In any one of the ink cartridges E1 to E5, the ink reservoir has a first surface and a second surface that face each other, and a side surface that connects the peripheral edges of the first surface and the second surface to each other. In addition, the atmosphere introduction part is disposed on the side surface of the ink reservoir, and the atmosphere communication path is communicated with the first communication chamber communicating with the atmosphere introduction part and the second space communicating with the internal space. And a communication path connecting the second communication chamber and the first communication chamber. The first communication chamber and the second communication chamber have a bottom surface on the first surface side and the first communication chamber. Formed as a space where the ceiling surface is located on the second surface side, the first hole for communicating the first communication chamber and the air introduction portion is disposed at a position spaced from the bottom surface of the first communication chamber, and A second hole for communicating the connection path with the second communication chamber; Ink cartridge E6, characterized in that it is arranged at a position away from the ceiling surface of serial second communication chamber.

  In the ink cartridge E6, when the first surface is placed as a placement surface, the first hole is located above the second hole, and the second surface is placed as a placement surface. In this case, the ink cartridge E7 is configured such that the second hole is positioned above the first hole.

  In the ink cartridge E6 or E7, the ink cartridge E8 is characterized in that the first hole is opened at a side wall surface of the first communication chamber and is in contact with a ceiling surface of the first communication chamber.

  In any one of the ink cartridges E6 to E8, the second hole is disposed at a position where the second hole is opened in a side wall surface of the second communication chamber and is in contact with a bottom surface of the second communication chamber. E9.

  In any one of the ink cartridges E6 to E9, the second communication chamber is formed with at least two holes, a third hole and a fourth hole, which connect the second communication chamber and the internal space. Characteristic ink cartridge E10.

  The ink cartridge E10 includes a partition plate that partitions the internal space into a first chamber and a second chamber, and is configured such that a ceiling surface of the second communication chamber also serves as the partition plate, and the third hole is the The ink cartridge E11 is opened in a side wall surface of the second communication chamber, and the fourth hole is opened in a ceiling surface of the second communication chamber.

  In the ink cartridge E10, the ink cartridge E12 is characterized in that the fourth hole is opened in a corner portion of the ceiling surface that is positioned farthest from the second hole.

  In the ink cartridge E10, the fourth hole is located at the uppermost position in the second communication chamber in the mounting posture of the ink jet recording apparatus.

  The ink cartridge E14 according to any one of the ink cartridges E10 to E13, wherein the opening area of the second hole is smaller than the opening areas of the third hole and the fourth hole.

  The ink cartridge E15 according to any one of the ink cartridges E10 to E14, wherein a flow path cross-sectional area of the connection path is smaller than an opening area of the third hole and the fourth hole.

  The ink cartridge E16 according to any one of the ink cartridges E6 to E15, wherein an opening area of the second hole is smaller than an opening area of the first hole.

  Ink cartridge E17, wherein in any one of ink cartridges E1 to E16, the cross-sectional area of the connection path is smaller than the opening area of the first hole.

  In any one of the ink cartridges E6 to E17, the ceiling surface of the first communication chamber and the side wall surface of the first communication chamber are formed by the frame member, and the bottom surface of the first communication chamber is formed by the film. An ink cartridge E18.

  In any one of the ink cartridges E6 to E18, the ceiling surface of the second communication chamber and the side wall surface of the second communication chamber are formed by the frame member, and the bottom surface of the second communication chamber is formed by the film. An ink cartridge E19.

  In the ink cartridge E10, the third hole is disposed at a position where the third hole is opened in the side wall surface of the second communication chamber and in contact with the bottom surface of the second communication chamber, and a part of the opening periphery of the third hole is the film. An ink cartridge E20, which is formed by:

  An ink cartridge including an ink storage body having an internal space for storing ink and attached to an ink jet recording apparatus that performs recording by discharging the ink, and is disposed on a side surface of the ink storage body and stored in the internal space. An ink supply hole for supplying the ink to the ink jet recording apparatus, an ink supply chamber which is formed by dividing the internal space by a partition wall and communicating with the ink supply hole; An ink communication hole that communicates with the space and opens in the partition wall, and the ink communication hole is positioned below the ink supply hole when mounted on the inkjet recording apparatus. Ink cartridge F1.

  In the ink cartridge F1, the ink communication hole is configured to be spaced apart from the bottom surface of the internal space by a predetermined distance in a posture in which the ink communication hole is mounted on the ink jet recording apparatus. .

  The ink cartridge F1 or F2 includes a recessed portion formed by recessing a part of a wall portion serving as a bottom surface of the internal space in a posture attached to the ink jet recording apparatus, and the recessed portion is the An ink cartridge F3, which is located below the ink communication hole.

  In the ink cartridge F3, the ink communication hole is configured so that the ink communication hole is located in a space formed by the recessed portion.

  In the ink cartridge F1 or F2, the wall portion that becomes the bottom surface of the internal space in the posture attached to the ink jet recording apparatus is formed as a stepped step portion, and the lowest step among the step portions is the ink. An ink cartridge F5 configured to be positioned below the communication hole.

  In the ink cartridge F5, the ink communication hole is configured so that the ink communication hole is located in a space formed by the lowermost step in the stepped portion.

  In the ink cartridge F5 or F7, the side surface of the ink reservoir in which the ink supply unit is disposed is a portion that connects the peripheral edges of the first surface and the second surface of the ink reservoir facing each other, The width dimension of the space formed by the recessed portion or the space formed by the lowermost step among the stepped portions is at least smaller than the facing distance between the first surface and the second surface. An ink cartridge F7.

  The ink cartridge F8 according to any one of the ink cartridges F1 to F7, wherein the ink supply chamber is formed in a tapered shape in which a cross-sectional area decreases as the distance from the ink supply hole increases.

  In any one of the ink cartridges F1 to F8, the partition wall is connected to a wall portion serving as a bottom surface of the internal space in a posture attached to the ink jet recording apparatus, and is formed to be inclined upward from the wall portion. An ink cartridge F9.

  In the ink cartridge F9, the ink communication hole is formed in the partition wall that is inclined upward from the wall portion.

  One of the ink cartridges F5 to F10 includes a rotating member that is pivotally supported in the internal space and rotates as the ink decreases, and a part of the rotating member is the stepped step portion. The ink cartridge F11 is configured to be positioned in a space formed by a step portion adjacent to the lowermost step.

  In any one of the ink cartridges F1 to F11, the ink stored in the internal space is disposed on the side surface of the ink storage body and attached to the ink jet recording apparatus. An ink cartridge F12 including an ink supply unit that supplies the recording apparatus.

  An ink storage body that forms an ink storage chamber for storing ink; and a rotation member that is rotatably provided in the ink storage chamber and rotates as the ink decreases. The ink reservoir includes a passage in which the light blocking member is displaceable by a pair of wall surfaces substantially parallel to the rotating surface of the rotating member, and ink jet recording. In the ink cartridge provided with the detected portion that is irradiated with light from the outside when attached to the apparatus, the detected portion is provided on the lower side of the light blocking portion with the light blocking portion and the pair of wall surfaces. An ink cartridge G1 having a pair of second gaps continuous with a pair of first gaps formed between the first gap and the second gap being narrower than the first gap.

  In the ink cartridge G1, the detected portion includes a first standing wall that is located between the pair of wall surfaces, extends substantially parallel to the rotation surface, and is thicker than the light blocking portion. The ink gap G2 is formed between the pair of wall surfaces and the first standing wall.

  In the ink cartridge G2, the detected portion includes a bottom surface that connects the lower ends of the pair of wall surfaces and on which the first standing wall is erected, and the bottom surface is lowered toward the lower side on the ink storage chamber side. The ink cartridge G3 is configured to be inclined.

  In the ink cartridge G3, an ink cartridge G4 is characterized in that an edge portion where the first standing wall and the bottom surface intersect with each other is formed in an angular shape in cross section.

  In the ink cartridge G2 or G3, an ink supply unit that is provided in the ink storage body below the bottom surface of the detection unit and supplies ink in the ink storage chamber to the ink jet recording apparatus, the ink supply unit, and the detection target And a second standing wall that extends from the inner surface of the ink reservoir that connects the bottom surface of the section and extends from a position continuous with the first standing wall toward the ink supply section. Ink cartridge G5.

  In the ink cartridge G5, the ink cartridge G6 is characterized in that an edge portion where the second standing wall and the inner surface of the ink storage body intersect is formed in an angular shape in cross section.

  In the ink cartridge G5 or G6, the inner surface of the ink storage body standing on the second standing wall includes an inclined surface that is inclined downward from the detected portion side toward the ink supply portion side. Ink cartridge G7 to be used.

  In any one of the ink cartridges G1 to G7, the rotating member is pivotally supported by connecting the light blocking portion, a balance portion located on the opposite side of the light detecting portion, and the balance portion and the light blocking portion. An ink cartridge G8, wherein at least the balance portion of the rotating member is made of a material having a specific gravity smaller than the specific gravity of the ink.

  In the ink cartridge G8, the balance portion is made of polypropylene, and the ink cartridge G9.

  In the ink cartridges G3 to G9, the detected portion includes a ceiling surface that is arranged to face the bottom surface and is connected to the upper edge portions of the pair of wall surfaces, and the ceiling surface has the light blocking portion on the ceiling surface. An ink cartridge G10, which is disposed at a contact position.

  An ink storage body that forms an ink storage chamber for storing ink; and a rotation member that is rotatably provided in the ink storage chamber and rotates as the ink decreases. The ink reservoir includes a passage in which the light blocking member is displaceable by a pair of wall surfaces substantially parallel to the rotating surface of the rotating member, and ink jet recording. In the ink cartridge provided with the detected portion that is irradiated with light from the outside when attached to the apparatus, the detected portion is located below the light blocking portion, the light blocking portion and the pair of wall surfaces. A pair of liquid guide paths that are respectively continuous with the pair of first gaps formed between the two, and the pair of liquid guide paths draws ink remaining in the first gap by capillary action. Ink cartridge G11 to be a butterfly.

  An ink cartridge that includes an ink storage body having an internal space in which ink is stored in a part thereof and is detachably attached to the ink jet recording apparatus, and a flexible and gas-blocking packaging bag that contains the ink cartridge The ink reservoir includes a frame member having a first opening communicating with the internal space, and a flexible member that is fixed to a peripheral portion of the first opening and closes the first opening. And a first film having gas permeability, and a decompression space that is a space other than the space in which ink is stored in the internal space and is decompressed to a first pressure lower than atmospheric pressure, and the packaging bag The ink cartridge package H1 is characterized in that the inside thereof is depressurized to a second pressure lower than the first pressure.

  In the ink cartridge package H1, the frame member includes a first rib that supports the first film from the inner space side.

  In the ink cartridge package H2, the first film is fixed to the first rib, and the ink cartridge package H3.

  In the ink cartridge package H2 or H3, the ink reservoir is fixed to a second opening that opens on the opposite side of the frame member from the first opening and communicates with the internal space, and a peripheral edge of the second opening. A second film having flexibility and gas permeability that closes the second opening, and a partition plate that partitions the internal space into a first chamber on the first opening side and a second chamber on the second opening side The partition plate is provided with the first rib for supporting the first film on the first opening side, and the second rib for supporting the second film on the second opening side. An ink cartridge package H4, wherein

  In the ink cartridge package H4, the second film is fixed to the second rib, and the ink cartridge package H5.

  In any one of the ink cartridge packaging bodies H1 to H5, the internal space includes an ink space in which ink is stored at least in part, and an air communication space that communicates the ink space with the outside. An ink cartridge package H6 including the atmosphere communication space.

  An ink cartridge that includes an ink storage body having an internal space in which ink is stored in a part thereof and is detachably attached to the ink jet recording apparatus, and a flexible and gas-blocking packaging bag that contains the ink cartridge In the method of manufacturing an ink cartridge package comprising: a frame member having a first opening communicating with the internal space; and a flexible and gas permeable member that is fixed to a peripheral edge portion of the first opening and seals the first opening. A preparatory step for preparing the ink reservoir including the first film having the property, and the internal space of the ink reservoir prepared by the preparatory step is reduced in advance to a pressure lower than the atmospheric pressure, An ink dispensing process for dispensing ink so that a decompressed space reduced to a first pressure lower than atmospheric pressure remains in the internal space, and the ink dispensing process Therefore, a housing step for housing the ink cartridge filled with ink in the packaging bag, and a second lower than the first pressure in the packaging bag in which the ink cartridge is housed by the housing step. And a packaging space decompression step of decompressing the pressure to the pressure of the ink cartridge packaging body manufacturing method H7.

  In the ink cartridge package manufacturing method H7, the ink dispensing step includes a post-decompression step of depressurizing the decompression space to a third pressure lower than the first pressure and higher than the second pressure. A method H8 for producing an ink cartridge package characterized by comprising:

  In the manufacturing method H7 or H8 of the ink cartridge package, the preparation step includes a molding step of molding the ink reservoir including the frame member and a first rib that supports the first film from the inner space side. And a first adhering step of adhering the first film to the peripheral edge portion of the first opening and the first rib so as to close the first opening of the frame member molded by the molding step. A method H9 for producing an ink cartridge package characterized by comprising:

  In the ink cartridge package manufacturing method H9, in the molding step, the ink reservoir including the second opening that is opened on the opposite side to the first opening of the frame member and communicates with the internal space is molded. In the preparing step, a second film having flexibility and gas permeability is fixed to a peripheral portion of the second opening so as to close the second opening of the frame member formed by the forming step. An ink cartridge package manufacturing method H10, comprising a fixing step.

  In the ink cartridge package manufacturing method H10, in the molding step, a partition plate that partitions the internal space into a first chamber on the first opening side and a second chamber on the second opening side, and the partition plate The ink reservoir including the first rib standing on the first opening side and the second rib standing on the second opening side is molded, and the second adhering step is performed at a peripheral edge of the second opening. The method for manufacturing an ink cartridge package H11, wherein the first film is fixed to the portion, and the second rib and the second film are fixed to each other.

  An ink cartridge having an ink storage body having an ink storage chamber for storing ink and an ink supply path communicating with the ink storage chamber and detachably attached to the ink jet recording apparatus, wherein the ink outlet side of the ink supply path The ink extraction member inserted into the first insertion path is formed with a hollow ink extraction member for extracting the ink that is mounted on the ink jet recording apparatus and is extracted. An elastic member having elasticity for tightly contacting the ink, and provided in the ink storage chamber side of the ink supply path with respect to the ink storage chamber. 1 The insertion path is closed, and the ink reservoir is brought into contact with an end of the ink extraction member in a state of being mounted on the ink jet recording apparatus. A valve member that allows ink supply to the ink extraction member, and a cap that prevents the elastic member from coming off from the side opposite to the ink storage chamber side, and the cap includes the first insertion path. And a second insertion path into which the ink extraction member is inserted prior to the first insertion path, and a second insertion path therein, and the first of the second insertion paths. An inner cylindrical portion having an opening diameter at the end on the insertion path side smaller than an opening diameter on the side of the first insertion path where the ink extraction member is inserted, and a first outer side surrounding the inner cylindrical section A connecting portion that connects the tubular portion, the first outer tubular portion and the inner tubular portion on the side where the ink extraction member is inserted, the connecting portion, the first outer tubular portion, and the inner portion; The first insertion path and the inner side are formed by being surrounded by a cylindrical portion Ink cartridge I1, characterized in that it comprises an ink reservoir for storing ink flowing down from between the end of the Jo portion.

  In the ink cartridge I1, the cap is formed at an end portion on the first insertion path side of the first outer cylindrical portion, and a flange portion that comes into contact with a surface of the elastic member on which the ink extraction member is inserted; An ink cartridge I2 comprising a second outer cylindrical portion extending from the periphery of the flange portion to the ink storage chamber side along the outer peripheral surface of the elastic member.

  In the ink cartridge I2, the ink reservoir has a cylindrical ink supply part in which the ink supply path is formed, and a protrusion protruding outward is provided on the outer peripheral surface of the ink supply part. The second outer cylindrical portion includes the elastic member and the ink supply portion and extends toward the ink storage chamber, and a fitting portion into which the protrusion is fitted is formed. Ink cartridge I3.

  In the ink cartridge I2 or I3, the second outer cylindrical portion is formed with a notch extending from the end on the ink storage chamber side toward the flange portion.

  In any one of the ink cartridges I1 to I4, at least a part of the first insertion path is formed in a tapered shape in a sectional view that is reduced in diameter in a direction in which the ink extraction member is inserted. Ink cartridge I5.

  In any one of the ink cartridges I1 to I4, at least a part of the first insertion path is formed in a tapered shape and a step shape in a sectional view that is reduced in diameter in a direction in which the ink extraction member is inserted. An ink cartridge I6.

  In any one of the ink cartridges I1 to I6, at least a part of the second insertion path is formed in a tapered shape in a sectional view that is reduced in diameter in a direction in which the ink extraction member is inserted. Ink cartridge I7.

  In any one of the ink cartridges I3 to I7, the elastic member is press-fitted into a space surrounded by an end portion of the ink supply portion opposite to the ink storage chamber, the second outer cylindrical portion, and the flange portion. An ink cartridge I8, comprising: a first press-fit portion that is pressed, and a second press-fit portion that protrudes from the first press-fit portion toward the first insertion path and is press-fitted into the first insertion path.

  An ink cartridge having an ink storage chamber for storing ink therein and having a side surface extending in a substantially vertical direction when mounted on an ink jet recording apparatus, and is detachably mounted on the ink jet recording apparatus. The side surface includes an ink supply unit that supplies the ink stored in the ink storage chamber to the ink jet recording apparatus, an air introduction unit that introduces air into the ink storage chamber, and ink in the ink storage chamber. In order to detect the remaining amount, a detected portion irradiated with light emitted from an optical sensor provided in the ink jet recording apparatus is disposed, and the air introduction portion is located above the ink supply portion. And the detected portion is located above the ink supply portion and below the air introduction portion. Ink cartridge J1.

  In the ink cartridge J1, the ink storage chamber is provided with a rotation member having a light blocking portion that rotates as the ink decreases and is displaced by the rotation. A passage where the light blocking member is displaceably formed is formed by a part of a wall surface defining the storage chamber, and the position of the light blocking portion is detected by the optical sensor. The ink cartridge J2 is characterized in that the remaining amount of ink is detected.

  In the ink cartridge J2, the rotation member is provided with the light blocking member on one end side and a balance portion on the other end side, and rotates about the pivot between the light blocking portion and the balance portion. When the entire balance portion is located in the ink, the balance portion is displaced upward due to a buoyancy greater than gravity, and when the ink is reduced and part of the balance is exposed from the ink surface, the buoyancy is increased. An ink cartridge J3 that decreases and displaces downward.

  In the ink cartridge J3, a passage formed inside the air introduction portion, and a pressing member that is attached to the inside of the passage and is pressed from the ink jet recording apparatus side in a state where the ink cartridge is attached to the ink jet recording apparatus. A valve that allows the ink storage chamber to communicate with the outside when the pressing member is pressed, and blocks the communication between the ink storage chamber and the outside when the ink cartridge is detached from the ink jet recording apparatus. And an ink cartridge J4.

  In any one of the ink cartridges J1 to J4, the ink supply part and the detected part protrude from the side surface, and the detected part is located on the side of the side of the protruding side of the ink supply part and the air introduction part. The ink cartridge J5 is provided in the ink cartridge.

  The ink cartridge J5 includes an ink reservoir that forms the ink reservoir, and a case that encloses the ink reservoir and defines the side surface, the ink supply unit, the air introduction unit, and the detected unit Is formed so as to protrude from the ink reservoir, and the case exposes the ink supply part through-hole for projecting the ink supply part to the outside, the air introduction part through-hole, and the detected part to the outside. And an ink cartridge J6 having a detection window.

  In the ink cartridge J6, the case includes a protruding portion that protrudes outside the ink supply portion and the air introduction portion from both sides of the ink supply portion, the detected portion, and the air introduction portion. Ink cartridge J7 characterized by the above.

  In the ink cartridge J7, one of the protrusions includes a fitted portion that is fitted into a fitting portion that is disposed in a mounting portion of the inkjet recording apparatus.

  In the ink cartridge J8, the fitting portion is a guide bar extending along a direction in which the ink cartridge is attached to the attachment portion of the inkjet recording apparatus, and the guide rod is inserted into the fitted portion. Ink cartridge J9, characterized in that it is a guide groove extending in the direction of travel.

  A method of manufacturing an ink cartridge comprising an ink reservoir having an internal space in which ink is stored at least in part, and a case made of a plurality of components that enclose the ink reservoir, and detachably attached to an inkjet recording apparatus And an ink dispensing process for dispensing ink into the internal space, and the ink reservoir in a state where the ink is stored in the internal space by the ink dispensing process is accommodated in the case. An assembly step of assembling the plurality of component parts, and welding in which the plurality of component parts are vibrated by ultrasonic waves while the ink reservoir is housed in the case by the assembly step. An ink cartridge manufacturing method K1.

  In the ink cartridge manufacturing method K1, before the ink dispensing step, a frame member having a first opening that communicates with the internal space, and a flexible member that is fixed to the periphery of the first opening and closes the first opening. 2. A preparatory step of preparing the ink reservoir including a first film having a property and a first rib for supporting the first film from the inner space side is provided. Ink cartridge manufacturing method K2.

  In the ink cartridge manufacturing method K2, the preparation step includes a first molding step of molding the ink reservoir including the frame member and a first rib that supports the first film from the inner space side; A first adhering step of adhering the first film to a peripheral portion of the first opening and the first rib so as to close the first opening of the frame member molded by the first molding step; An ink cartridge manufacturing method K3, wherein:

  In the ink cartridge manufacturing method K3, in the first molding step, the ink reservoir including a second opening that is opened on a side opposite to the first opening of the frame member and communicates with the internal space is molded. A second fixing step of fixing a second film having flexibility and gas permeability to a peripheral portion of the second opening so as to close the second opening of the frame member molded by the first molding step; An ink cartridge manufacturing method K4, comprising:

  In the ink cartridge manufacturing method K4, in the first molding step, the inner space is divided into a first chamber on the first opening side and a second chamber on the second opening side, and the partition plate The ink reservoir including the first rib standing on the first opening side and the second rib standing on the second opening side is molded, and the second adhering step is performed at a peripheral edge of the second opening. The method of manufacturing an ink cartridge K5, wherein the second film is fixed to the portion and the second film is fixed to the second rib.

  In the ink cartridge manufacturing methods K3 to K5, the preparatory step is a second molding step of molding a rotating member that rotates the internal space as the ink decreases and has a light blocking portion that is displaced by the rotation. In the first molding step, a light path provided in the frame member is formed so as to displace the light blocking member, and light emitted from an optical sensor provided in the ink jet recording apparatus is irradiated. The ink storage body including a detected portion is molded, and the preparation step includes an attachment step of attaching a rotating member formed by the second molding step to the frame member. Ink cartridge manufacturing method K6.

  In the ink cartridge manufacturing method K6, in the first molding step, an ink supply unit that protrudes from a side surface of the frame member and supplies ink in the ink storage chamber to the ink jet recording apparatus, and the ink supply unit protrudes from the ink supply unit. An air introduction part that protrudes from the side surface of the frame member in the same direction as the ink supply part and introduces air into the ink storage chamber, and a side surface of the frame member from which the air introduction part and the ink supply part protrude. The ink reservoir including the detected portion protruding in the same direction as the air introduction portion and the ink supply portion protrude from between the air introduction portion and the ink supply portion is molded. An ink cartridge manufacturing method K7.

  In the ink cartridge manufacturing method K7, the preparation step includes: an ink supply part through-hole for projecting the ink supply part to the outside; an air introduction part through-hole for projecting the atmosphere introduction part to the outside; and the detected part. A third molding step of molding the plurality of components such that a detection window to be exposed to the outside is disposed on one surface of the case; and in the assembly step, the ink supply unit is inserted into the ink supply unit through-hole. The plurality of components molded by the third molding step are assembled so that the projecting portion protrudes outside, the atmosphere introducing portion projects outside from the atmosphere introducing through hole, and the detected portion is exposed to the outside from the detection window. In the welding step, the plurality of component parts are welded to each other in a portion other than one surface of the case.

  An ink cartridge that includes an ink storage chamber that stores ink therein and that is mounted on an ink jet recording apparatus that performs recording by discharging ink stored in the ink storage chamber. An ink supply unit that protrudes and supplies ink in the ink storage chamber to the ink jet recording apparatus, and protrudes outward from the one surface of the case in the same direction as the ink supply unit, and introduces air into the ink storage chamber And a pair of protrusions that are connected to the case and protrude outwardly from the ink supply part and the air introduction part in the same direction as the ink supply part and the air introduction part protrude. And the pair of protrusions are disposed on both sides of the ink supply unit and the air introduction unit, respectively. Cartridges L1.

  In the ink cartridge L1, the ink cartridge L2 is characterized in that one of the protrusions includes a fitted portion that is fitted into a fitting portion that is disposed in a mounting portion of the inkjet recording apparatus.

  In the ink cartridge L2, the fitting portion is a guide rod extending along a direction in which the ink cartridge is attached to the attachment portion of the inkjet recording apparatus, and the guide rod is inserted into the fitting portion. An ink cartridge L3, which is a guide groove extending in the direction of the ink.

  In any one of the ink cartridges L1 to L3, the case is formed in a substantially box shape including the one surface, and the pair of protrusions are arranged in a direction in which the ink supply unit and the air introduction unit are arranged. Protruding portions that are disposed at both ends of the one surface across the supply portion and the air introduction portion and that are positioned below in the state of being attached to the ink jet recording apparatus among the pair of protruding portions are: An ink cartridge L4, comprising an inclined surface extending upward continuously from the bottom surface of another case.

  In any one of the ink cartridges L1 to L4, the ink storage chamber is formed and includes an ink storage body included in the case. The ink supply unit and the air introduction unit are formed from the ink storage body. The case is formed so as to protrude outward, and the case has an ink supply part through-hole through which the ink supply part protrudes to the outside and an air introduction part through which the air introduction part protrudes to the outside. An ink cartridge L5, wherein a hole is formed.

  In the ink cartridge L5, a part of the ink reservoir is protruded from the space between the ink supply part and the air introduction part in the same direction as the direction in which the ink supply part or the air introduction part protrudes. A detection portion that is irradiated with light emitted from an optical sensor provided in the ink jet recording apparatus, and the one surface of the case has a detection opening at a position corresponding to the detection portion. An ink cartridge L6, wherein a window is formed.

  In the ink cartridge L6, a rotation member having a light blocking portion that rotates as the ink decreases and is displaced by the rotation is provided in the ink storage chamber. A passage in which the light blocking portion is displaceably formed is formed by a part of a wall surface defining the storage chamber, and the position of the light blocking portion is detected by the optical sensor, whereby the ink storage chamber The ink cartridge L7 is characterized in that the remaining amount of ink is detected.

It is the perspective view which showed the external appearance of the multifunctional device of this invention. It is a perspective view of a refill unit. It is a side view in the state where the door of the refill unit was opened. It is sectional drawing of the refill unit in the IV-IV line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the refill unit in the VV line | wire of FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of the door of a refill unit. FIG. 3 is a perspective view illustrating an appearance of a color ink cartridge. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of a color ink cartridge. It is the figure which showed the protector, (a) is a top view of the protector in IXa view of FIG. 8, (b) is sectional drawing of the protector in the IXb-IXb line | wire of FIG. 9 (a). FIG. 3 is a perspective view illustrating an appearance of a black ink cartridge. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a black ink cartridge. FIG. 3 is a perspective view illustrating an appearance of a large-capacity black ink cartridge. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of a large-capacity black ink cartridge. It is the figure which showed the ink storage body, (a) is a front view of an ink storage body, (b) is a rear view of an ink storage body. It is the figure which showed the supply path formation part, (a) is the figure (figure on the back side of a frame part) which showed the outline of the supply path formation part, (b) is XVb of Fig.15 (a). FIG. 4C is a cross-sectional view of a supply path forming portion along line -XVb, where FIG. 4C is a diagram illustrating a state where the remaining amount of ink is reduced, and FIG. 4D is a diagram illustrating a state where ink supply is completed. is there. It is the figure which showed the atmosphere communication path formation part, (a) is the perspective view which showed the outline of the atmosphere communication path formation part, (b) is the atmosphere communication path in the arrow XVIb view of Fig.16 (a). It is the figure which showed the formation part, (c) is the figure which showed the atmosphere communication path formation part in the arrow XVIc view of Fig.16 (a). It is the figure which showed the dispensing path formation part, (a) is the figure which showed the outline of the dispensing path formation part, (b) is the dispensing path in the XVIIb-XVIIb line | wire of Fig.17 (a) It is sectional drawing of a formation part. It is the figure which showed the detection part vicinity, (a) is the figure which showed the outline of the detection part vicinity, (b) is sectional drawing of the detection part in the XVIIIb-XVIIIb line | wire of Fig.18 (a). (C) is sectional drawing of the detection part vicinity in the XVIIIc-XVIIIc line | wire of Fig.18 (a). It is the figure which showed the sensor arm, (a) is the figure which showed the front side of the sensor arm, (b) is the figure which showed the sensor arm in the arrow XIXb view of Fig.19 (a). It is the figure which showed a part of ink reservoir, (a) is the figure which showed the side of the ink reservoir, (b) is the figure which showed a part of the front of an ink reservoir, (C) is sectional drawing in the XXc-XXc line | wire of Fig.20 (a). It is the front view which decomposed | disassembled the ink storage body. FIG. 2 is an exploded view of an ink supply mechanism and an air introduction mechanism, (a) is an exploded view of the ink supply mechanism, and (b) is an exploded view of the air introduction mechanism. It is the figure which showed the supply cap, (a) is the figure which showed the side surface of a supply cap, (b) is the figure which showed the side surface of the supply cap in the arrow XXIIIb view of Fig.23 (a). (C) is the figure which showed the plane of the supply cap, (d) is the figure which showed the bottom face of the supply cap, (e) is the supply in the XXIIIe-XXIIIe line | wire of FIG.23 (c). It is sectional drawing of a cap. It is the figure which showed the supply joint, (a) is the figure which showed the side surface of the supply joint, (b) is the figure which showed the plane of the supply joint, (c) is the bottom face of a supply joint (D) is sectional drawing of the supply joint in the XXIVd-XXIVd line | wire of FIG.24 (b). It is the figure which showed the supply valve, (a) is the figure which showed the side surface of the supply valve, (b) is the figure which showed the side surface of the supply valve in the arrow XXVb view of Fig.25 (a). (C) is a diagram showing a plane of the supply valve, (d) is a diagram showing a bottom surface of the supply valve, and (e) is a line XXVe-XXVe in FIG. 25 (c). It is sectional drawing of a supply valve. It is the figure which showed the 1st supply spring, (a) is the figure which showed the side surface of the 1st supply spring, (b) is the figure which showed the plane of the 1st supply spring, (c) FIG. 27 is a view showing a bottom surface of the first supply spring, and FIG. 26D is a cross-sectional view of the first supply spring taken along line XXVId-XXVId in FIG. It is the figure which showed the supply slider, (a) is the figure which showed the side surface of the supply slider, (b) is the figure which showed the side surface of the supply slider in the arrow XXVIIb view of Fig.27 (a). (C) is the figure which showed the plane of the supply slider, (d) is the figure which showed the bottom face of the supply slider, (e) is the supply in the XXVIIe-XXVIIe line | wire of FIG.27 (c). It is sectional drawing of a slider. It is the figure which showed the valve seat, (a) is the figure which showed the side surface of the valve seat, (b) is the figure which showed the plane of the valve seat, (c) is the bottom face of the valve seat. (D) is sectional drawing of the valve seat in the XXVIIId-XXVIIId line | wire of FIG.28 (b). It is the figure which showed the non-return valve, (a) is the figure which showed the side surface of the non-return valve, (b) is the figure which showed the plane of the non-return valve, (c) It is the figure which showed the bottom face of the check valve, (c) is sectional drawing of the check valve in the XXIXd-XXIXd line | wire of Fig.29 (a). It is the figure which showed the cover, (a) is the figure which showed the side of the cover, (b) is the figure which showed the plane of the cover, (c) was the figure which showed the bottom face of the cover FIG. 30D is a cross-sectional view of the cover taken along line XXXd-XXXd in FIG. It is the figure which showed the atmospheric cap, (a) is the figure which showed the side of the atmospheric cap, (b) is the figure which showed the side of the atmospheric cap in the arrow XXXIB view of FIG. 31 (a). (C) is the figure which showed the plane of the atmospheric cap, (d) is the figure which showed the bottom face of the atmospheric cap, (e) is the atmosphere in the XXXIe-XXXIe line | wire of FIG.31 (c). It is sectional drawing of a cap. It is the figure which showed the atmospheric joint, (a) is the figure which showed the side of the atmospheric joint, (b) is the figure which showed the plane of the atmospheric joint, (c) is the bottom face of the atmospheric joint (D) is sectional drawing of the air | atmosphere joint in the XXXIId-XXXIId line | wire of FIG.32 (b). It is the figure which showed the atmospheric valve, (a) is the figure which showed the side surface of the atmospheric valve, (b) is the figure which showed the bottom face of the atmospheric valve. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view illustrating a state in which an ink supply mechanism and an air introduction mechanism are assembled to the ink supply body and the air introduction body. It is a figure explaining the manufacturing process before a film is welded. It is a figure explaining the welding process of a film, (a) is a figure explaining the welding surface to the frame part of a film, (b) is a figure explaining the welding process which welds a film to a frame part. is there. It is a figure explaining the manufacturing process performed after welding of a film, (a) is a figure explaining the attachment process which attaches an ink supply mechanism and an air introduction mechanism to a flame | frame part, (b) demonstrates a pressure reduction process. (C) is a figure explaining the ink dispensing process. It is a figure explaining the assembly | attachment process of a case, (a) is a figure explaining the process of clamping a frame part, (b) is a figure explaining the welding process which welds a case. It is a figure explaining the manufacturing process performed before shipment of an ink cartridge, (a) is a figure explaining the process of attaching a protective cap, (b) explains the process of packaging an ink cartridge with a package. It is a figure to do. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a method for mounting an ink cartridge to a multi-function device. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a state where an ink cartridge is mounted on a multi-function device. It is the figure which showed the operation | movement of the sensor arm corresponding to the ink remaining amount in an ink storage chamber, (a) has shown the state with ink remaining, (b) has shown the state without ink remaining. ing. It is the figure which showed the operation principle of the sensor arm typically. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a state when the ink cartridge is attached to the multi-function device 1 in a wrong posture. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a method for detaching an ink cartridge from an ink jet recording apparatus. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the ink cartridge is detached from the multifunction device and a front view of the ink cartridge. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure which reduces that ink adheres to the detection surface of the detection part of an ink cartridge, (a) has shown the state from which an ink cartridge is attached or detached from a refill unit, (b) FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a surface on which a detection unit of the ink cartridge is formed, and FIG. 4C is a perspective view of the ink cartridge. It is the figure which showed the front of a case, (a) is a front view of a case which can accommodate an ink cartridge for large capacity black or black, and an ink cartridge for color ink, (b) is a black FIG. 6 is a front view of a case that can store a color ink cartridge and a color ink cartridge. It is sectional drawing which showed the outline of the cross section of a case, (a) is sectional drawing which showed the outline of the case in the XXXIXa-XXXIXa line | wire of Fig.48 (a), (b) is FIG.48 (b). It is sectional drawing which showed the outline in the XXXIXb-XXXIXb line. FIG. 5 is a schematic cross-sectional view schematically showing a state where each ink cartridge is mounted in a case. It is the schematic diagram which showed the combination of the case member typically. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an ink cartridge and a refill unit according to a second embodiment, (a) is a diagram illustrating a side surface of the ink cartridge according to the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram illustrating the refill unit of the ink cartridge. It is the figure which showed the cross section of the state with which it was mounted | worn in. FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the ink cartridge of the third and fourth embodiments, (a) is a perspective view showing the appearance of the ink cartridge of the third embodiment, and (b) is a fourth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a perspective view illustrating an appearance of an example ink cartridge. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of the combination of a case member. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of the combination of a case member. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of the combination of a case member.

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Multifunctional device, 1a Front surface, 1b Bottom surface, 2 Receiver, 11 Printer part, 12 Scanner part, 13 Refill unit, 14 Ink cartridge, 15 Document loading part, 16 Document cover, 17 Automatic document feeder (ADF), 18 Document tray, 19 Paper discharge tray, 20 Open / close lid, 21 opening, 22 opening, 23 slot part, 30 operation panel, 31-34 operation key, 35 liquid crystal display part, 40 case, 40a notch part, 41 door, 42 bottom plate part 42a Bearing part 43 Side plate part 44 Top plate part 44a Rib 44b Swing arm mechanism 45 Opening 46 Locking member fitting part 47 Bulkhead part 48 Needle forming part 49 Needle 49a Notch 50 Storage chamber (Storage section), 51 Placement surface, 52 Ink extraction port, 53 Ink tube, 54 Passage, 55 Protrusion, 56 Back surface, 57 Sensor, 57a light emitting part, 57b light receiving part, 60 door body, 60a claw storage part, 60b slide rail, 60c claw storage part, 60d storage part, 60e pin support hole, 61 pressure holding member, 61a claw, 61b Wall surface, 61c Projection, 62 Door lock member, 62a Main shaft part, 62b Key part, 62c Seat part, 62d Slide groove, 62e Claw, 63 Lock release lever, 63a Support pin, 63b Interlocking cam, 64 Rotating shaft part, 65 Pull-out member, 65a extending portion, 65b bent portion, 65c outer wall surface, 66 coil spring, 67 coil spring, 110 frame portion (frame member, part of ink reservoir), 111 ink reservoir chamber (internal space), 111a first chamber 111b second chamber, 112a first opening (part of opening, opening region), 112b second opening (part of opening, opening region), 11 3 Opening of first storage chamber (communication path connecting first chamber and second chamber), 114 Opening of second storage chamber (communication path connecting first chamber and second chamber), 116 Ink supply body, 116a 116b Projection (protrusion), 117 Air introduction body, 117a, 117b Projection part, 120 Ink supply part (part of ink reservoir), 130 Air introduction part (part of ink reservoir), 140 Detection part (ink) Part of reservoir, detected part, irradiated part), 140a, 140b detection surface (a pair of opposing side surfaces), 140c edge (edge where the front side in the mounting direction intersects the detection surface), 141 inclusion ( Including a pair of wall surfaces substantially parallel to the rotation surface of the light blocking part), 141a bottom wall (wall forming the bottom surface of the detected part, bottom wall forming the bottom surface of the irradiated part), 141b both side walls (irradiated) Side wall forming a pair of side surfaces), 141c 奧 side 141d Ceiling wall (ceiling wall forming the ceiling surface of the irradiated portion), 150 Ink dispensing portion (part of ink reservoir), 160 film (part of ink reservoir, first film (first opening side) Film), second film (film welded to the second opening side)), 200 case, 210 first case member (part of the case), 210a maximum surface, 210b to 210e standing wall portion, 211 case Notch (part of the ink supply part through hole of the case), 212 Case notch (part of the air introduction part through hole of the case), 213 Case notch (part of the detection window of the case, opposite of the detected part) Part of notches forming detection windows on both sides of the side surface), 211a, 212a contact groove, 214a case protrusion (part of case protrusion), 214b case protrusion (part of case protrusion), 214a , 214b1 Case protruding notch, 214a2 inclined surface, 214b2 Case fitting groove (part of fitted portion of case, part of guide groove), 215a to 215c Bar member, 216 First case welded portion, 216a Concavity, 216b engaging portion, 217 second case welding portion, 217a locking portion, 220 second case member (part of case), 220a maximum surface, 220b to 220e standing wall portion, 221 case notch portion (through ink supply portion of case) 222, part of the hole), 222 case notch (a part of the case air introduction part through hole), 223 case notch (a part of the detection window of the case, a notch that forms detection windows on both sides of the opposite side of the detected part) 224a Case protrusion (part of case protrusion) 224b Case protrusion (part of case protrusion), 224a1, 224b1 Case protrusion notch, 24a2 inclined surface, 224b2 case fitting groove (part of case fitting portion, part of guide groove), 225a to 225c fitting hole portion, 226 first case welding portion, 226a concave portion, 226b engaging portion, 227 second case welded portion, 227a locking portion, 300 protector, 310 protector through hole, 320 first protector fitting portion, 321, 322 protector standing wall, 330a, 330b second protector fitting portion, 330a1, 330b1 protrusion, 330a2, 330b2 Shaft part, 340a, 340b Protector loose insertion part, 400a, 400b Outer peripheral welded part (outer frame part, opening peripheral edge), 400b1 Some wall part of outer peripheral welded part, 411a-417a Inner peripheral welded part (film Ribs to support, first ribs to support the first film), 411b to 417b inner circumference welded part (support the film) 418a, 418b connecting rib (auxiliary wall portion), 420 supply path forming portion, 421 first supply communication hole (ink supply hole), 422 supply partition wall (partition wall) 423 Second supply communication hole (ink communication hole), 424 Supply concave portion (concave contact portion), 424a Recess space (space formed by the concave contact portion), 425 Arm clamping portion (clamping portion), 426 Ink supply chamber, 427 Plate portion, 428 Plate portion, 430 Atmospheric communication passage forming portion (atmospheric communication passage), 431 First atmospheric communication chamber (first communication chamber communicating with the atmospheric introduction portion), 431a Side wall surface, 432 Second atmospheric communication chamber ( Second communication chamber communicating with the internal space), 432a side wall surface, 433 atmospheric connection path (connection path), 433a communication port, 433b communication port (second hole connecting the connection path and the second communication chamber), 434 1 atmosphere ream Communication holes (first holes for communicating the first communication chamber and the atmosphere introduction portion), 435 second atmosphere communication holes (third holes for communicating the second communication chamber and the internal space), 436 third atmosphere communication holes ( A fourth hole for communicating the second communication chamber and the internal space), 437a first surface (the bottom surface of the first communication chamber, the bottom surface of the second communication chamber, the bottom surface of the atmosphere communication path, one surface of the atmosphere communication path), 437b 2nd surface, 438 plate part, 440 connection formation part (partition plate, support plate), 441 atmosphere side connection part (part of partition plate), 442 dispensing side connection part (part of partition plate), 443 446 connection communication hole (communication path connecting the first chamber and the second chamber), 450 dispensing channel forming unit (injection unit), 451 dispensing cylinder unit (ink injection channel), 451a opening (ink injection channel) 451b bottom (bottom of the ink injection flow path), 452 first dispensing communication hole (first hole, part of the communication part) 453 Dispensing partition wall (wall part, part of communication part), 453a Dispensing partition channel flow path (connection channel, part of communication part), 454 Second dispensing communication hole (second hole, part of communication part) Part), 460a to 460c through hole, 470 sensor arm (rotating member), 471 balance part (part of rotating member, floating part), 472 mounting part (connecting part of rotating member, part of connecting part) 472a Mounting shaft (shaft upper part), 473 arm part (light blocking part of rotating member, part of connecting part, light blocking part), 473a vertical arm part (part of light blocking part, part of connecting part), 473b Inclined arm part (part of light blocking part), 473c Shielding arm part (part of light blocking part, light blocking part), 473d Rib (part of light blocking part), 473e1, 473e2 Arm projection part (light blocking part) Part, light shielding part), 500 ink supply mechanism, 501 supply valve member (valve member) , 510 atmosphere introduction mechanism, 511 atmosphere valve member, 520 ink dispensing plug, 520a outer end face, 600 supply cap (cap), 600a opening, 601 supply fixing part (second outer cylindrical part), 602 ink storage part, 603a , 603b engagement hole (fitting portion of the second outer cylindrical portion), 604a, 604b supply cap cutout portion (cutout portion of the second outer cylindrical portion), 605 insertion hole (part of the second insertion path, ink) Supply port), 606a first upper wall, 606b inclined wall (part of second insertion path, inner cylindrical portion), 606c lower wall (connecting portion), 606d second upper wall (flange portion), 606e outer peripheral wall ( First outer cylindrical portion), 607 ink storage portion, 610 supply joint (elastic member), 611 joint outer peripheral portion (first press-fit portion), 612 joint inner peripheral portion (second press-fit portion), 612a upper surface, 6 12b bottom surface, 612c opening, 612d insertion passage, 613 joint abutting portion, 613a tip, 613b inner peripheral surface, 614 joint protrusion, 614a inner peripheral surface, 614b step surface, 615 ink flow path (ink extraction member is inserted) First insertion path), 615a Step channel (a part of the first insertion path), 615b Protrusion channel (a part of the first insertion path), 615c Abutment channel (a part of the first insertion path) ), 620 Supply valve (part of valve member), 621 Valve bottom wall, 622 Valve outer peripheral wall, 622a Valve protrusion, 623 Valve guide groove, 624 Valve protruding wall, 625 Valve restricting portion, 626 Valve hook, 627 Ink Flow path, 628 valve receiving portion, 629 valve inner peripheral wall, 630 first supply spring (part of valve member), 631 spring bottom, 632 spring Part, 633 spring flexible part, 634 ink flow path, 634a upper flow path, 634b flexible part flow path, 634c bottom flow path, 640 supply slider (part of valve member), 641 slider outer peripheral wall, 642a, 642b slider Protruding wall, 643 Loose insertion part, 644 Slider base part, 645 Slider through hole, 650 Second supply spring (part of valve member), 651 Spring bottom part, 652 Spring upper part, 653 Spring flexible part, 654 Ink flow path, 654a Top channel, 654b Flexible channel, 654c Bottom channel, 660 Valve seat, 661 Valve seat bottom, 662 Valve seat receiver, 662a Valve seat inclined surface, 662b First valve seat through hole, 663 Second valve Seat through hole, 664 Valve seat communication groove, 665 Valve seat protrusion, 670 Check valve, 671 Umbrella, 671a Connection, 671b Blade, 6 2 Shaft part, 672a Sphere part, 680 cover, 681 Cover outer peripheral wall, 682 Cover upper part, 683 First cover through hole, 684 Second cover through hole, 700 Atmospheric cap, 701 Atmospheric adhering part, 702 Atmospheric cap bottom part, 703a, 703b engagement hole, 704a, 704b air cap notch, 705 air cap insertion hole, 710 air joint, 711 joint outer periphery, 712
Joint inner peripheral part, 712a upper surface, 713 joint projection part, 713a tip part, 714 joint skirt part, 715 joint passage, 720 atmosphere valve (valve member forming the atmosphere introduction path), 721 valve bottom wall, 721a valve opening part ( 721b convex portion, 722 valve outer peripheral wall, 722a valve protrusion, 723 valve guide groove, 724 valve protrusion wall, 725 valve restricting portion, 726 valve hook portion, 727 ink flow path, 728 Valve receiving portion, 729 Valve inner wall, 730 First atmospheric spring, 731 Spring bottom, 732 Spring upper portion, 733 Spring flexible portion, 734 Ink flow path, 734a Upper flow path, 734b Flexible flow path, 734c Bottom flow path , 740 Air slider, 741 Slider outer circumference Wall, 742a, 742b Slider protruding wall, 743 Loose insertion part, 744 Slider base part, 745 Slider through hole, 750 Second atmospheric spring, 751 Spring bottom part, 752 Spring top part, 753 Spring flexible part, 754 Ink flow path, 754a Top flow path, 754b Flexible section flow path, 754c Bottom flow path, 800 Inner peripheral surface (ink supply path) of ink supply body, 801 Projecting wall, 801a Step surface, 810 Inner peripheral surface of air introduction body, 811 Projection section , 900 Ultrasonic welding surface, 910 Decompression device, 911 Suction tube, 912 Suction pump, 920 Ink dispensing needle, 930 Packaging bag, 931 opening, 940 Decompression device, 941 Suction tube, 942 Suction pump, 1013 Refill unit, 1040 case 1041 Door, 1200 case, 1200α case, 1210 First case Member (part of case), 1210a maximum surface, 1210b to 1210e Standing wall part, 1211 Case notch part (part of case ink supply part through hole), 1212 Case notch part (part of case air introduction part through hole) ), 1213 Case cutout (part of the detection window of the case, part of the cutout forming the detection window on both sides of the opposite side of the detected part), 1214a Case protrusion (part of the protrusion of the case), 1214b Case Protruding part (part of protruding part of case), 1214a1, 1214b1 Case protruding notch, 1214a2 inclined surface, 1214b2 Case fitting groove (part of fitted part of case, part of guide groove), 1215a to 215c Bar member, 1216 first case welded portion, 1216a recessed portion, 1216b engaged portion, 1217 second case welded portion, 1217a locking portion, 1218 rib 1300 protector, 2100 ink reservoir, 2200 case, 2210 first case member (part of case), 2210a maximum surface, 2210b to 2210e, standing wall portion, 2211 case notch portion (part of ink supply portion through hole of case), 2212 Case notch (a part of the air introduction part through hole of the case), 2213 Case notch (a part of the detection window of the case, a part of the notch forming the detection window on both sides of the opposite side of the detected part), 2214a Case protrusion (part of case protrusion), 2214b Case protrusion (part of case protrusion), 2214a2 Inclined surface, 2215a-2215c Bar member, 2216 First case weld, 2216a Concavity, 2216b Engagement Part, 2217 second case weld part, 2217a locking part, 2220 second case member (part of case), 22 0a Maximum surface, 2220b to 2220e Standing wall, 2221 Case notch (part of the ink supply part through hole of the case), 2222 Case notch (part of the air introduction part through hole of the case), 2223 Case notch (case Part of the detection window, part of the notch forming the detection window on both sides of the opposite side of the detected part), 2224a case protrusion (part of the case protrusion), 2224b case protrusion (case protrusion (Part), 2224a2 inclined surface, 2226 first case welded portion, 2226a recessed portion, 2226b engaging portion, 2227 second case welded portion, 2227a locking portion, 2040 case, 2300 protector, 3013 refill unit, 3014 ink cartridge, 3061 Press holding member, 3200 case, 3130 through-hole, 3131 atmospheric introduction passage, 4014 Cartridge, 4120 ink supply part, 4121 ink supply port, 4122 joint, 4123 valve, 4124 spring member, 4125 partition wall, 4130 through-hole, 4131 air introduction passage, 4132 seal member, 4140 detection part, 5014 ink cartridge, 5120 ink Supply portion, A Document cover rotation direction, B First and second case member longitudinal direction, case longitudinal direction, ink reservoir longitudinal direction, frame portion longitudinal direction, C protector longitudinal direction, D ink flow Road, E-cass, F Ink cartridge mounting direction, G1 sensor arm rotation direction (buoyancy> gravity in balance), G2 sensor arm rotation (buoyancy <gravity in balance), I ink Liquid level, K ink flow path, L air introduction path, O1 b The axial direction of the ink supply mechanism, the axial direction of the O2 air introduction mechanism, the P1, P2 suction pump, the center line of the Q valve seat, the virtual outer peripheral line of the R valve seat protrusion, the X predetermined space, after the p1 ink dispensing process The pressure in the ink storage chamber (first pressure), the pressure in the ink storage chamber after the p2 post-decompression step (second pressure), the pressure in the packaging bag after the p3 packaging space depressurization step (third pressure), t1 distance between the second supply communication hole and the lower side wall of the frame part, t2 distance between the second supply communication hole and the lower side wall of the supply recess, t3 first gap, t4 second gap, t5 width of the detected part, t6 Diameter of ink supply opening, t7 Range for storing ink in ink reservoir, t8 needle protrusion distance, total protrusion distance of t9 protrusion and case protrusion, t10 diameter of supply cap insertion hole (diameter of ink supply opening) Connect both ends of the ink supply port in the horizontal direction. ), T11 thickness of the case protrusion in the width direction (distance connecting both ends of the protrusion in the horizontal direction), t12 diameter of the communication hole, t13 width of the case protrusion, t14, t15 of the case in the ink cartridge arrangement direction Width, t16 Distance between needles entering the color ink cartridge, t17 Distance between needle entering the black ink cartridge and the adjacent needle, t18 to t22 Thickness of each case member

Claims (13)

A set of ink cartridges composed of three or more types of ink cartridges having different sizes,
Each ink cartridge includes a pair of case members that form a substantially rectangular parallelepiped case in which an ink storage chamber is arranged inside by being joined to each other,
The case member is a substantially rectangular parallelepiped plate-like portion that forms a first surface that is the maximum area of the case, and the first member of the case is erected in a substantially vertical direction from an outer edge of the plate-like portion. A standing wall portion that forms a surface adjacent to the surface, and a first notch portion that is formed at the tip of the standing wall portion and forms a through hole that communicates the inside of the case with the outside,
Of the three types of ink cartridges having different sizes, the pair of case members constituting the largest first ink cartridge is one of the pair of case members constituting the smallest third ink cartridge. Both the side and the other side are configured such that the standing wall portion is high,
The second largest second ink cartridge joins one side of the pair of case members constituting the first ink cartridge and the other side of the pair of case members constituting the third ink cartridge. A set of ink cartridges characterized by being configured.   The through hole serves as a passage when the ink in the ink storage chamber is supplied to the outside, and the first cutout portions on one side and the other side of the pair of case members are connected to each other. The ink cartridge set according to claim 1, wherein the ink cartridge set is formed as a result.   The first cutout portion formed in each of the pair of case members constituting the first ink cartridge, and the first portion formed in each of the pair of case members constituting the third ink cartridge. 3. The set of ink cartridges according to claim 2, wherein the notch portions have the same shape.   In the pair of case members constituting the first ink cartridge and the pair of case members constituting the third ink cartridge, the heights of the standing wall portions on one side and the other side thereof are equal. The set of ink cartridges according to any one of claims 1 to 3.   The height of the standing wall portion of the pair of case members constituting the first ink cartridge is twice the height of the standing wall of the pair of case members constituting the third ink cartridge. The set of ink cartridges according to claim 4.   The height of the standing wall portion on one side of the pair of case members constituting the first ink cartridge and the height of the standing wall portion on one side of the pair of case members constituting the third ink cartridge The difference is that the height of the standing wall portion on the other side of the pair of case members constituting the first ink cartridge is different from the height of the standing wall portion on the other side of the pair of case members constituting the third ink cartridge. The ink cartridge set according to claim 1, wherein the set of ink cartridges is different from a difference in height. One of the pair of case members constituting the first ink cartridge has a rib standing from the plate-like portion in the height direction of the standing wall portion,
The height of the rib corresponds to the difference in height of the standing wall portion between one of the pair of case members constituting the first ink cartridge and one of the pair of case members constituting the third ink cartridge. A set of ink cartridges according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein:   The partition wall for forming the storage space which accommodates the valve mechanism which opens and closes the said through-hole in each of a pair of said case member is integrally formed, Each of Claim 1 to 7 characterized by the above-mentioned. A set of ink cartridges. An ink reservoir that is housed in the case constituted by the pair of case members and includes the ink reservoir;
The ink reservoir includes an ink supply portion that protrudes to the outside through the through hole in a state of being accommodated in the case, and an ink supply hole is formed at a protruding tip of the ink supply portion. A set of ink cartridges according to any one of claims 1 to 8. The ink reservoir includes an air introduction unit that introduces air into the ink reservoir that protrudes in a direction parallel to the ink supply unit,
The standing wall portion of the case member includes a second notch portion for forming a through hole for projecting the atmosphere introduction portion to the outside on the same surface as the surface on which the first notch portion is formed. The ink cartridge set according to claim 9. The ink reservoir protrudes in a direction parallel to the ink supply unit between the ink supply unit and the air introduction unit, and an optical element provided in the inkjet recording device when the ink storage unit is attached to the ink jet recording device. An irradiated portion that is irradiated with light emitted from the sensor,
The standing wall portion of the case member includes a third notch portion for forming a through hole that exposes the irradiated portion to the outside on the same surface as the surface on which the first notch portion is formed. The set of ink cartridges according to claim 9, wherein:   12. The ink cartridge set according to claim 1, wherein the case member is made of a resin material. An ink storage chamber in which ink is stored; and a through hole for supplying the ink in the ink storage chamber to the outside, and the ink stored in the ink storage chamber when the ink storage chamber is mounted on the ink storage chamber In an ink cartridge to be supplied to an ink jet recording apparatus,
Each is formed of a resin material, and includes a pair of case members that form a substantially rectangular parallelepiped case in which an ink storage chamber is arranged inside by being coupled to each other,
The case member is erected in a substantially vertical direction from a plate-like portion formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape that forms a first surface having the maximum area of the case, and an outer edge of the plate-like portion, and the case member A standing wall portion that forms a surface adjacent to one surface, and a notch portion that is formed at the tip of the standing wall portion to form the through hole;
The ink cartridge according to claim 1, wherein the notch is formed in the same shape with respect to each of the pair of case members.

Images